SGC stimulators

ABSTRACT

The present disclosure relates to stimulators of soluble guanylate cyclase (sGC), pharmaceutical formulations comprising them and their uses thereof, alone or in combination with one or more additional agents, for treating various diseases, wherein an increase in the concentration of nitric oxide (NO) or an increase in the concentration of cyclic Guanosine Monophosphate (cGMP), or both, or an upregulation of the NO pathway is desirable. The compounds are of Formula I:

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No.15/693,758, filed Sep. 1, 2017, which claims the benefit of the filingdate, under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e), of U.S. Provisional Application No.62/382,942, filed on Sep. 2, 2016; U.S. Provisional Application No.62/423,445, filed on Nov. 17, 2016; U.S. Provisional Application No.62/468,598, filed on Mar. 8, 2017; and U.S. Provisional Application No.62/482,486 filed on Apr. 6, 2017. The entire contents of each of theabove-referenced applications are incorporated herein by reference.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present disclosure relates to stimulators of soluble guanylatecyclase (sGC), pharmaceutical formulations comprising them and theiruses thereof, alone or in combination with one or more additionalagents, for treating various diseases, wherein an increase in theconcentration of nitric oxide (NO) or an increase in the concentrationof cyclic Guanosine 3′,5′-Monophosphate (cGMP) or both, or anupregulation of the NO pathway is desirable.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Soluble guanylate cyclase (sGC) is the primary receptor for nitric oxide(NO) in vivo. sGC can be activated via both NO-dependent andNO-independent mechanisms. In response to this activation, sGC convertsguanosine 5′-triphosphate (GTP) into the secondary messenger cyclic GMP(cGMP). The increased level of cGMP, in turn, modulates the activity ofdownstream effectors including protein kinases, phosphodiesterases(PDEs) and ion channels.

In the body, NO is synthesized from arginine and oxygen by variousnitric oxide synthase (NOS) enzymes and by sequential reduction ofinorganic nitrate. Three distinct isoforms of NOS have been identified:inducible NOS (iNOS or NOS II) found in activated macrophage cells;constitutive neuronal NOS (nNOS or NOS I), involved in neurotransmissionand long term potentiation; and constitutive endothelial NOS (eNOS orNOS III) which regulates smooth muscle relaxation and blood pressure.Experimental and clinical evidence indicates that reducedconcentrations, bioavailability and/or responsiveness to endogenouslyproduced NO contributes to the development of disease.

NO-independent, heme-dependent, sGC stimulators, have several importantdifferentiating characteristics, when compared to other types of sGCmodulators, including crucial dependency on the presence of the reducedprosthetic heme moiety for their activity, strong synergistic enzymeactivation when combined with NO and stimulation of the synthesis ofcGMP by direct stimulation of sGC, independent of NO. The benzylindazolecompound YC-1 was the first sGC stimulator to be identified. AdditionalsGC stimulators with improved potency and specificity for sGC have sincebeen developed.

Compounds that stimulate sGC in an NO-independent manner offerconsiderable advantages over other current alternative therapies thateither target the aberrant NO pathway or that are directed at diseaseswherein upregulation of the NO pathway is beneficial. There is a need todevelop novel stimulators of sGC. These compounds are useful fortreating various diseases, wherein the diseases or disorders are onesthat would benefit from sGC stimulation or from an increase in theconcentration of nitric oxide (NO) or cyclic guanosine3′,5′-monophosphate (cGMP) or both, or wherein an upregulation of the NOpathway is desirable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention is directed to compounds of Formula I, orpharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof,

wherein:rings E and A form the core of the molecule and are aromatic; eachinstance of X and Y is independently selected from N or C; wherein amaximum of 4 instances of X and Y are simultaneously N;W is eitheri) absent, with J^(B) connected directly to the carbon atom bearing twoJ groups, each J is independently selected from hydrogen or methyl, n is1 and J^(B) is a C₁₋₇ alkyl chain optionally substituted by up to 9instances of fluorine; orii) a ring B that is a phenyl, a C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl ring or a 5 or6-membered heteroaryl ring, containing 1 or 2 ring nitrogen atoms;

-   -   wherein when ring B is the phenyl or 5 or 6-membered heteroaryl        ring; each J is independently selected from hydrogen or methyl;        n is an integer selected from 0 to 3; and each J^(B) is        independently selected from halogen, —CN, a C₁₋₆ aliphatic,        —OR^(B) or a C₃₋₈ cycloaliphatic ring; and    -   wherein when ring B is the C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl ring; each J is        hydrogen; n is an integer selected from 0 to 3 and each J^(B) is        independently selected from halogen, —CN, a C₁₋₆ aliphatic or        —OR^(B1);    -   wherein each J^(B) that is a C₁₋₆ aliphatic and each J^(B) that        is a C₃₋₈ cycloaliphatic ring is optionally and independently        substituted with up to 3 instances of R³;        each R^(B) is independently selected from a C₁₋₆ aliphatic or a        C₃₋₈ cycloaliphatic ring; said R^(B) optionally and        independently substituted with up to 3 instances of R^(3a);        each R^(B1) is independently selected from hydrogen, a C₁₋₆        aliphatic or a C₃₋₈ cycloaliphatic ring;        wherein each of said C₁₋₆ aliphatic and each of said C₃₋₈        cycloaliphatic ring is optionally and independently substituted        with up to 3 instances of R^(3b);        each R³, R^(3a) and R^(3b) is, in each instance, independently        selected from halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, —O(C₁₋₄        alkyl) or —O(C₁₋₄ haloalkyl);        p is an integer selected from 1, 2 or 3;        each J^(C) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen,        C₁₋₄ aliphatic, C₁₋₄ alkoxy or —CN; wherein each said C₁₋₄        aliphatic and C₁₋₄ alkoxy is optionally and independently        substituted by up to 3 instances of C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄        haloalkoxy, —OH or halogen;        Q, G and Z are each independently N, S or O, wherein at least        two of Q, G and Z are N;        q is 0, 1 or 2;        R¹⁰ is C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally and independently substituted with        0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, phenyl optionally and independently        substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, 5- or 6-membered        heteroaryl optionally and independently substituted with 0-3        occurrences of R¹⁵, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl optionally and independently        substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵ or 3-8 membered        heterocyclyl optionally and independently substituted with 0-3        occurrences of R¹⁵; wherein each of said 5- to 6-membered        heteroaryl ring and each of said 3-8 membered heterocyclyl        contains up to 3 ring heteroatoms independently selected from N,        O or S;        R¹¹ is H, —NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)R^(15a),        —SO₂R^(b2), —SR^(b2), halo, —OCF₃, —CN, hydroxyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl        optionally and independently substituted with 0-2 occurrences of        R^(b2), C₂₋₆ alkynyl optionally and independently substituted        with 0-2 occurrences of R^(b2); C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally and        independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, C₁₋₆        alkoxy optionally and independently substituted with 0-5        occurrences of R¹⁵, phenyl optionally and independently        substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, 5- to 6-membered        heteroaryl optionally and independently substituted with 0-3        occurrences of R¹⁵, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl optionally and independently        substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵ or 3-8 membered        heterocyclyl optionally and independently substituted with 0-3        occurrences of R¹⁵; wherein each of said 5- to 6-membered        heteroaryl and each of said 3-8 membered heterocyclyl contains        up to 3 ring heteroatoms independently selected from N, O or S;        or        when R¹⁰ is a substituent of Z, R¹⁰ and R¹¹, taken together with        Z and the carbon to which R¹¹ is attached, form a 3-10 membered        heterocyclic ring optionally and independently substituted with        0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵; wherein each of said 3-10 membered        heterocyclyl contains up to 3 ring heteroatoms independently        selected from N, O or S;        R¹⁵ is halo, —OR^(b2), —SR^(b2), —NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)R^(b2),        —C(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2), —NR^(b2)C(O)OR^(b2), —OC(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2)C₂₋₄        alkenoxy, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl optionally and independently        substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸, phenyl optionally and        independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸, 5- or        6-membered heteroaryl optionally and independently substituted        with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸ or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl        optionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of        R¹⁸;        wherein each of said 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl ring and each        of said 3-10 membered heterocyclyl contains up to 3 ring        heteroatoms independently selected from N, O or S;        R^(15a) is C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl optionally and independently        substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸, phenyl optionally and        independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸, 5- or        6-membered heteroaryl optionally and independently substituted        with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸ or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl        optionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of        R¹⁸; wherein each of said 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl ring and        each of said 3-10 membered heterocyclyl contains up to 3 ring        heteroatoms independently selected from N, O or S;        each R¹⁸ is independently selected from halo, hydroxyl, C₁₋₆        alkyl, C₁₋₆ alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkyl or phenyl;        R^(a2) is hydrogen, —C(O)R^(b2), C₁₋₆ alkyl or C₁₋₆ haloalkyl;        and        R^(b2) is hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl or C₁₋₆ haloalkyl.

The invention is also directed to a pharmaceutical compositioncomprising a compound according to Formula I, or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof, and at least one pharmaceutically acceptableexcipient or carrier. The invention is also directed to a pharmaceuticalformulation or dosage form comprising the pharmaceutical composition.

The invention also provides a method of treating or preventing adisease, health condition or disorder in a subject in need thereof,comprising administering, alone or in combination therapy, atherapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to the subject; wherein thedisease is one that benefits from sGC stimulation or from an increase inthe concentration of NO or cGMP or both, or from an upregulation of theNO pathway.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a plot of the long-term potentiation of wild type (WT) micehippocampal slices (top curve), R6/2 mice hippocampal slices (bottomcurve), and R6/2 mice hippocampal slices treated with 7 nM Compound I-1(middle curve).

FIG. 2 is a plot of the long-term potentiation of wild type (WT) micehippocampal slices (top curve, overlaps with middle curve), R6/2 micehippocampal slices (bottom curve), and R6/2 mice hippocampal slicestreated with 46 nM Compound I-1 (middle curve, overlaps with top curve).

FIG. 3 is a plot of the long-term potentiation of wild type (WT) micehippocampal slices (top curve, overlaps with middle curve), R6/2 micehippocampal slices (bottom curve), and R6/2 mice hippocampal slicestreated with 308 nM Compound I-1 (middle curve, overlaps with topcurve).

FIG. 4 is a picture of the brain of a rat treated with a peripherallyrestricted sGC stimulator (left) and a picture of the brain of a rattreated with a compound of the invention (right).

FIG. 5 is a picture of the brain of a mouse transferred using anice-cold spatula to mouse brain matrix with coronal spacing for slicingat 1 mm intervals.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

Reference will now be made in detail to certain embodiments of theinvention, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanyingstructures and formulae. While the invention will be described inconjunction with the enumerated embodiments, it will be understood thatthey are not intended to limit the invention to those embodiments.Rather, the invention is intended to cover all alternatives,modifications and equivalents that may be included within the scope ofthe present invention as defined by the claims. The present invention isnot limited to the methods and materials described herein but includeany methods and materials similar or equivalent to those describedherein that could be used in the practice of the present invention. Inthe event that one or more of the incorporated literature references,patents or similar materials differ from or contradict this application,including but not limited to defined terms, term usage, describedtechniques or the like, this application controls.

Definitions and General Terminology

For purposes of this disclosure, the chemical elements are identified inaccordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, and theHandbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75^(th) Ed. 1994. Additionally,general principles of organic chemistry are described in “OrganicChemistry”, Thomas Sorrell, University Science Books, Sausalito: 1999,and “March's Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 5^(th) Ed., Smith, M. B. andMarch, J., eds. John Wiley & Sons, New York: 2001, which are hereinincorporated by reference in their entirety.

As described herein, compounds of Formula I may be optionallysubstituted with one or more substituents, such as illustrated generallybelow, or as exemplified by particular classes, subclasses and speciesof the invention. The phrase “optionally substituted” is usedinterchangeably with the phrase “substituted or unsubstituted.” Ingeneral, the term “substituted” refers to the replacement of one or morehydrogen radicals in a given structure with the radical of a specifiedsubstituent. Unless otherwise indicated, an optionally substituted groupmay have a substituent at each substitutable position of the group. Whenmore than one position in a given structure can be substituted with morethan one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituentmay be either the same or different at each position unless otherwisespecified. The term “optionally and independently” may be used todescribe this situation. As an example, one substituent disclosed hereinis R¹⁰, which may be, among other options, C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵. In this instance,the C₁₋₆ alkyl may be “optionally substituted”: it may be unsubstituted(i.e., 0 occurrences of R¹⁵) or substituted (i.e., 1, 2, or 3occurrences of R¹⁵). When there are multiple occurrences of R¹⁵ (e.g.,2), each R¹⁵ may be the same substituent (e.g., two fluoro atoms) ordifferent (e.g., —OH and chloro). As will be apparent to one of ordinaryskill in the art, groups such as —H, halogen, —NO₂, —CN, —OH, —NH₂ or—OCF₃ would not be substitutable groups.

The phrase “up to”, as used herein, refers to zero or any integer numberthat is equal or less than the number following the phrase. For example,“up to 3” means any one of 0, 1, 2, or 3. As described herein, aspecified number range of atoms includes any integer therein. Forexample, a group having from 1-4 atoms could have 1, 2, 3 or 4 atoms. Agroup having from 0-3 atoms could have 0, 1, 2, or 3 atoms. When anyvariable occurs more than one time at any position, its definition oneach occurrence is independent from every other occurrence.

Selection of substituents and combinations envisioned by this disclosureare only those that result in the formation of stable or chemicallyfeasible compounds. Such choices and combinations will be apparent tothose of ordinary skill in the art and may be determined without undueexperimentation. The term “stable”, as used herein, refers to compoundsthat are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allowfor their production, detection, and, in some embodiments, theirrecovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposesdisclosed herein. In some embodiments, a stable compound is one that isnot substantially altered when kept at a temperature of 25° C. or less,in the absence of moisture or other chemically reactive conditions, forat least a week. A chemically feasible compound is a compound that canbe prepared by a person skilled in the art based on the disclosuresherein supplemented, if necessary, relevant knowledge of the art.

A compound, such as the compounds of Formula I or Table I or othercompounds herein disclosed, may be present in its free form (e.g. anamorphous form, or a crystalline form or a polymorph). Under certainconditions, compounds may also form co-forms. As used herein, the termco-form is synonymous with the term multi-component crystalline form.The formation of a salt is determined by how large the difference is inthe pKas between the partners that form the mixture. For purposes ofthis disclosure, compounds include pharmaceutically acceptable salts,even if the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” is not explicitlynoted.

Unless only one of the isomers is drawn or named specifically,structures depicted herein are also meant to include all stereoisomeric(e.g., enantiomeric, diastereomeric, atropoisomeric and cis-transisomeric) forms of the structure; for example, the R and Sconfigurations for each asymmetric center, Ra and Sa configurations foreach asymmetric axis, (Z) and (E) double bond configurations, and cisand trans conformational isomers. Therefore, single stereochemicalisomers as well as racemates, and mixtures of enantiomers,diastereomers, and cis-trans isomers (double bond or conformational) ofthe present compounds are within the scope of the present disclosure.Unless otherwise stated, all tautomeric forms of the compounds of thepresent disclosure are also within the scope of the invention.

The present disclosure also embraces isotopically-labeled compoundswhich are identical to those recited herein, but for the fact that oneor more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or massnumber different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found innature. All isotopes of any particular atom or element as specified arecontemplated within the scope of the compounds of the invention, andtheir uses. Exemplary isotopes that can be incorporated into compoundsof the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen,phosphorus, sulfur, fluorine, chlorine, and iodine, such as ²H, ³H, ¹¹C,¹³C, ¹⁴C, ¹³N, ¹⁵N, ¹⁵O, ¹⁷O, ¹⁸O, ³²P, ³³P, ³⁵S, ¹⁸F, ³⁶Cl, ¹²³I, and¹²⁵I, respectively. Certain isotopically-labeled compounds of thepresent invention (e.g., those labeled with ³H and ¹⁴C) are useful incompound and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. Tritiated (i.e.,³H) and carbon-14 (i.e., ¹⁴C) isotopes are useful for their ease ofpreparation and detectability. Further, substitution with heavierisotopes such as deuterium (i.e., ²H) may afford certain therapeuticadvantages resulting from greater metabolic stability (e.g., increasedin vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements) and hence may bepreferred in some circumstances. Positron emitting isotopes such as ¹⁵O,¹³N, ¹¹C, and ¹⁸F are useful for positron emission tomography (PET)studies to examine substrate receptor occupancy. Isotopically labeledcompounds of the present invention can generally be prepared byfollowing procedures analogous to those disclosed in the Schemes and/orin the Examples herein below, by substituting an isotopically labeledreagent for a non-isotopically labeled reagent.

The term “aliphatic” or “aliphatic group” or “aliphatic chain”, as usedherein, means a straight-chain (i.e., unbranched) or branched,substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon chain that is completelysaturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation. Unlessotherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1-20 aliphatic carbonatoms. In some embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-10 aliphaticcarbon atoms. In other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-8aliphatic carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, aliphatic groupscontain 1-6 aliphatic carbon atoms. In other embodiments, aliphaticgroups contain 1-4 aliphatic carbon atoms and in yet other embodiments,aliphatic groups contain 1-3 or 1-2 aliphatic carbon atoms. Suitablealiphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched,substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl groups. Specificexamples of aliphatic groups include, but are not limited to: methyl,ethyl, propyl, butyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, vinyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl,butenyl, propargyl, acetylene and the like. An aliphatic group will berepresented by the term “C_(x-y) aliphatic”; wherein x and y are theminimum and the maximum number of carbon atoms forming the aliphaticchain.

The term “alkyl” (as in “alkyl chain” or “alkyl group”), as used herein,refers to a saturated linear or branched-chain monovalent hydrocarbonradical. Unless otherwise specified, an alkyl group contains 1-20 carbonatoms (e.g., 1-20 carbon atoms, 1-10 carbon atoms, 1-8 carbon atoms, 1-6carbon atoms, 1-4 carbon atoms or 1-3 carbon atoms). Examples of alkylgroups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl,isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, s-butyl (sec-butyl), t-butyl, pentyl,hexyl, heptyl, octyl and the like. An alkyl group will be represented bythe term “C_(x-y) alkyl”; wherein x and y are the minimum and themaximum number of carbon atoms forming the alkyl chain.

The term “alkenyl” (as in “alkenyl chain” or “alkenyl group”), refers toa linear or branched-chain monovalent hydrocarbon radical with at leastone site of unsaturation, i.e., a carbon-carbon, sp² double bond,wherein the alkenyl radical includes radicals having “cis” and “trans”orientations, or alternatively, “E” and “Z” orientations. Unlessotherwise specified, an alkenyl group contains 2-20 carbon atoms (e.g.,2-20 carbon atoms, 2-10 carbon atoms, 2-8 carbon atoms, 2-6 carbonatoms, 2-4 carbon atoms or 2-3 carbon atoms). Examples include, but arenot limited to, vinyl, allyl and the like. An alkenyl group will berepresented by the term “C_(x-y) alkenyl”; wherein x and y are theminimum and the maximum number of carbon atoms forming the alkenylchain.

The term “alkynyl” (as in “alkynyl chain” or “alkynyl group”), refers toa linear or branched monovalent hydrocarbon radical with at least onesite of unsaturation, i.e., a carbon-carbon sp triple bond. Unlessotherwise specified, an alkynyl group contains 2-20 carbon atoms (e.g.,2-20 carbon atoms, 2-10 carbon atoms, 2-8 carbon atoms, 2-6 carbonatoms, 2-4 carbon atoms or 2-3 carbon atoms). Examples include, but arenot limited to, ethynyl, propynyl, and the like. An alkynyl group willbe represented by the term “C_(x-y) alkynyl”; wherein x and y are theminimum and the maximum number of carbon atoms forming the alkynylchain.

The term “carbocyclic” refers to a ring system formed only by carbon andhydrogen atoms. Unless otherwise specified, throughout this disclosure,carbocycle is used as a synonym of “non-aromatic carbocycle” or“cycloaliphatic”. In some instances the term could be used in the phrase“aromatic carbocycle”, and in this case it would refers to an “arylgroup” as defined below.

The term “cycloaliphatic” (or “non-aromatic carbocycle”, “non-aromaticcarbocyclyl”, “non-aromatic carbocyclic” or “cycloaliphatic ring”)refers to a cyclic hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or thatcontains one or more units of unsaturation but which is not aromatic,and which has a single point of attachment to the rest of the molecule.In one embodiment, the term “cycloaliphatic” refers to a monocyclicC₃₋₁₂ hydrocarbon. A cycloaliphatic ring will be represented by the term“C_(x-y) cycloaliphatic”; wherein x and y are the minimum and themaximum number of carbon atoms forming the cycloaliphatic ring. Suitablecycloaliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, cycloalkyl,cycloalkenyl, and cycloalkynyl. Examples of aliphatic groups includecyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexyl,cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, cycloheptenyl, norbornyl, cyclooctyl,cyclononyl, cyclodecyl, cycloundecyl, cyclododecyl, and the like.

“Cycloalkyl” or “cycloalkyl ring”, as used herein, refers to a ringsystem in which is completely saturated and which has a single point ofattachment to the rest of the molecule. In one embodiment, the term“cycloalkyl” refers to a monocyclic C₃₋₁₂ saturated hydrocarbon.Suitable cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl,cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cycloheptenyl,norbornyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, cyclodecyl, cycloundecyl,cyclododecyl, and the like. A cycloalkyl ring will be represented by theterm “C_(x-y) cycloalkyl”; wherein x and y are the minimum and themaximum number of carbon atoms forming the cycloalkyl ring.

“Heterocycle” (or “heterocyclyl” or “heterocyclic or “heterocyclicring”), as used herein, refers to a ring system in which one or morering members are an independently selected heteroatom, which iscompletely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturationbut which is not aromatic, and which has a single point of attachment tothe rest of the molecule. Unless otherwise specified, through thisdisclosure, heterocycle is used as a synonym of “non-aromaticheterocycle”. In some instances the term could be used in the phrase“aromatic heterocycle”, and in this case it would refer to a “heteroarylgroup” as defined below. In some embodiments, the heterocycle has 3-10ring members in which one or more ring members is a heteroatomindependently selected from oxygen or nitrogen. In other embodiments, aheterocycle may be a monocycle having 3-7 ring members (2-6 carbon atomsand 1-4 heteroatoms).

Examples of heterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to, thefollowing monocycles: 2-tetrahydrofuranyl, 3-tetrahydrofuranyl,2-tetrahydrothiophenyl, 3-tetrahydrothiophenyl, 2-morpholino,3-morpholino, 4-morpholino, 2-thiomorpholino, 3-thiomorpholino,4-thiomorpholino, 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl, 3-pyrrolidinyl,1-tetrahydropiperazinyl, 2-tetrahydropiperazinyl,3-tetrahydropiperazinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl,1-pyrazolinyl, 3-pyrazolinyl, 4-pyrazolinyl, 5-pyrazolinyl,1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl, 4-piperidinyl,2-thiazolidinyl, 3-thiazolidinyl, 4-thiazolidinyl, 1-imidazolidinyl,2-imidazolidinyl, 4-imidazolidinyl, 5-imidazolidinyl.

The term “heteroaryl” (or “heteroaromatic” or “heteroaryl group” or“aromatic heterocycle” or “heteroaryl ring”) used alone or as part of alarger moiety as in “heteroarylalkyl” or “heteroarylalkoxy” refers to aring which is aromatic and contains one or more heteroatoms, has between5 and 6 ring members and which has a single point of attachment to therest of the molecule. Heteroaryl rings include, but are not limited tothe following monocycles: 2-furanyl, 3-furanyl, N-imidazolyl,2-imidazolyl, 4-imidazolyl, 5-imidazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-isoxazolyl,5-isoxazolyl, 2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, 5-oxazolyl, N-pyrrolyl,2-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrrolyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidinyl,4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl (e.g., 3-pyridazinyl),2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl, 5-thiazolyl, tetrazolyl (e.g., 5-tetrazolyl),triazolyl (e.g., 2-triazolyl and 5-triazolyl), 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl,pyrazolyl (e.g., 2-pyrazolyl), isothiazolyl, 1,2,3-oxadiazolyl,1,2,5-oxadiazolyl, 1,2,4-oxadiazolyl, 1,2,3-triazolyl,1,2,3-thiadiazolyl, 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl, 1,2,5-thiadiazolyl, pyrazinyl,1,3,5-triazinyl.

The term “ring atom” refers to an atom such as C, N, O or S that is partof the ring of an aromatic ring, a cycloaliphatic ring, a heterocyclicor a heteroaryl ring. A “substitutable ring atom” is a ring carbon ornitrogen atom bonded to at least one hydrogen atom. The hydrogen can beoptionally replaced with a suitable substituent group. Thus, the term“substitutable ring atom” does not include ring nitrogen or carbon atomswhich are shared when two rings are fused. In addition, “substitutablering atom” does not include ring carbon or nitrogen atoms when thestructure depicts that they are already attached to one or more moietyother than hydrogen and no hydrogens are available for substitution.

“Heteroatom” refers to one or more of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen,including any oxidized form of nitrogen, sulfur, the quaternized form ofany basic nitrogen, or a substitutable nitrogen of a heterocyclic orheteroaryl ring, for example N (as in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl), NH (asin pyrrolidinyl) or NR⁺ (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl).

In some embodiments, two independent occurrences of a variable may betaken together with the atom(s) to which each variable is bound to forma 5-8-membered aryl or heteroaryl ring or a 3-8-membered cycloaliphaticring or heterocyclyl. Exemplary rings that are formed when twoindependent occurrences of a substituent are taken together with theatom(s) to which each variable is bound include, but are not limited tothe following: a) two independent occurrences of a substituent that arebound to the same atom and are taken together with that atom to form aring, where both occurrences of the substituent are taken together withthe atom to which they are bound to form a heterocyclyl, heteroaryl,cycloaliphatic or aryl ring, wherein the group is attached to the restof the molecule by a single point of attachment; and b) two independentoccurrences of a substituent that are bound to different atoms and aretaken together with both of those atoms to form a heterocyclyl,heteroaryl, cycloaliphatic or aryl ring, wherein the ring that is formedhas two points of attachment with the rest of the molecule.

It will be appreciated that a variety of other rings can be formed whentwo independent occurrences of a substituent are taken together with theatom(s) to which each substituent is bound and that the examplesdetailed above are not intended to be limiting.

As described herein, a bond drawn from a substituent to the center ofone ring within a multiple-ring system (as shown below), representssubstitution of the substituent at any substitutable position in any ofthe rings within the multiple ring system. For example, formula D3represents possible substitution in any of the positions shown informula D4:

This also applies to multiple ring systems fused to optional ringsystems (which would be represented by dotted lines). For example, inFormula D5, X is an optional substituent both for ring A and ring B.

If, however, two rings in a multiple ring system each have differentsubstituents drawn from the center of each ring, then, unless otherwisespecified, each substituent only represents substitution on the ring towhich it is attached. For example, in Formula D6, Y is an optionalsubstituent for ring A only, and X is an optional substituent for ring Bonly.

As used herein, the term “alkoxy” refers to an alkyl group, aspreviously defined, attached to the molecule, or to another chain orring, through an oxygen (“alkoxy” i.e., —O-alkyl) atom.

As used herein, the terms “halogen” or “halo” mean F, Cl, Br, or I.

The terms “haloalkyl”, “haloalkenyl”, “haloaliphatic”, and “haloalkoxy”mean alkyl, alkenyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be,substituted with one or more halogen atoms. For example a C₁₋₃ haloalkylcould be —CFHCH₂CHF₂ and a C₁₋₂ haloalkoxy could be —OC(Br)HCHF₂. Thisterm includes perfluorinated alkyl groups, such as —CF₃ and —CF₂CF₃.

As used herein, the term “cyano” refers to —CN or —C≡N.

The terms “cyanoalkyl”, “cyanoalkenyl”, “cyanoaliphatic”, and“cyanoalkoxy” mean alkyl, alkenyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case maybe, substituted with one or more cyano groups. For example a C₁₋₃cyanoalkyl could be —C(CN)₂CH₂CH₃ and a C₁₋₂ cyanoalkenyl could be═CHC(CN)H₂.

As used herein, an “amino” group refers to —NH₂.

The terms “aminoalkyl”, “aminoalkenyl”, “aminoaliphatic”, and“aminoalkoxy” mean alkyl, alkenyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case maybe, substituted with one or more amino groups. For example a C₁₋₃aminoalkyl could be —CH(NH₂)CH₂CH₂NH₂ and a C₁₋₂ aminoalkoxy could be—OCH₂CH₂NH₂.

The term “hydroxyl” or “hydroxy” refers to —OH.

The terms “hydroxyalkyl”, “hydroxyalkenyl”, “hydroxyaliphatic”, and“hydroxyalkoxy” mean alkyl, alkenyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the casemay be, substituted with one or more —OH groups. For example a C₁₋₃hydroxyalkyl could be —CH₂(CH₂OH)CH₃ and a C₄ hydroxyalkoxy could be—OCH₂C(CH₃)(OH)CH₃.

As used herein, a “carbonyl”, used alone or in connection with anothergroup refers to —C(O)— or —C(O)H. For example, as used herein, an“alkoxycarbonyl,” refers to a group such as —C(O)O(alkyl).

As used herein, an “oxo” refers to ═O, wherein oxo is usually, but notalways, attached to a carbon atom (e.g., it can also be attached to asulfur atom). An aliphatic chain can be optionally interrupted by acarbonyl group or can optionally be substituted by an oxo group, andboth expressions refer to the same: e.g. —CH₂—C(O)—CH₃. When an “oxo’group is listed as a possible substituent on a ring or another moiety orgroup (e.g. an alkyl chain) it will be understood that the bond betweenthe oxygen in said oxo group and the ring, or moiety it is attached towill be a double bond, even though sometimes it may be drawn genericallywith a single line. For example, in the example depicted below, J^(D)attached to the ring may be selected from a number of differentsubstituents. When J^(D) is Oxo, it will be understood that the bondbetween J^(D) and the ring is a double bond. When J^(D) is a halogen, itwill be understood that the bond between J^(D) and the ring is a singlebond. In some instances, for example when the ring contains anunsaturation or it has aromatic character, the compound may exist in twoor more possible tautomeric forms. In one of them the bond between theoxo group and the ring will be a double bond. In the other one, ahydrogen bond will be exchanged between atoms and substituents in thering, so that the oxo becomes a hydroxy and an additional double bond isformed in the ring. Whereas the compound is depicted as D7 or D8, bothwill be taken to represent the set of all possible tautomers for thatparticular compound.

could be, for example:

could be, for example

In all other situations, a “linker”, as used herein, refers to adivalent group in which the two free valences are on different atoms(e.g. carbon or heteroatom) or are on the same atom but can besubstituted by two different substituents. For example, a methylenegroup can be C₁ alkyl linker (—CH₂—) which can be substituted by twodifferent groups, one for each of the free valences (e.g. as inPh-CH₂-Ph, wherein methylene acts as a linker between two phenyl rings).Ethylene can be C₂ alkyl linker (—CH₂CH₂—) wherein the two free valencesare on different atoms. The amide group, for example, can act as alinker when placed in an internal position of a chain (e.g. —CONH—). Thecompounds of the invention are defined herein by their chemicalstructures and/or chemical names. Where a compound is referred to byboth a chemical structure and a chemical name, and the chemicalstructure and chemical name conflict, the chemical structure isdeterminative of the compound's identity.

Compound Embodiments

The present invention is directed to compounds of Formula I, orpharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof,

wherein:rings E and A form the core of the molecule and are aromatic; eachinstance of X and Y is independently selected from N or C; wherein amaximum of 4 instances of X and Y are simultaneously N;W is eitheri) absent, with J^(B) connected directly to the carbon atom bearing twoJ groups, each J is independently selected from hydrogen or methyl, n is1 and J^(B) is a C₁₋₇ alkyl chain optionally substituted by up to 9instances of fluorine; orii) a ring B that is a phenyl, a C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl ring or a 5 or6-membered heteroaryl ring, containing 1 or 2 ring nitrogen atoms;wherein when ring B is the phenyl or 5 or 6-membered heteroaryl ring;each J is independently selected from hydrogen or methyl; n is aninteger selected from 0 to 3; and each J^(B) is independently selectedfrom halogen, —CN, a C₁₋₆ aliphatic, —OR^(B) or a C₃₋₈ cycloaliphaticring; andwherein when ring B is the C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl ring; each J is hydrogen; nis an integer selected from 0 to 3 and each J^(B) is independentlyselected from halogen, —CN, a C₁₋₆ aliphatic or —OR^(B1) wherein eachJ^(B) that is a C₁₋₆ aliphatic and each J^(B) that is a C₃₋₈cycloaliphatic ring is optionally and independently substituted with upto 3 instances of R³;each R^(B) is independently selected from a C₁₋₆ aliphatic or a C₃₋₈cycloaliphatic ring; said R^(B) optionally and independently substitutedwith up to 3 instances of R^(3a);each R^(B1) is independently selected from hydrogen, a C₁₋₆ aliphatic ora C₃₋₈ cycloaliphatic ring; wherein each of said C₁₋₆ aliphatic and eachof said C₃₋₈ cycloaliphatic ring is optionally and independentlysubstituted with up to 3 instances of R^(3b);each R³, R^(3a) and R^(3b) is, in each instance, independently selectedfrom halogen, —CN, C₁₋₄ alkyl, C₁₋₄ haloalkyl, —O(C₁₋₄ alkyl) or —O(C₁₋₄haloalkyl);p is an integer selected from 1, 2 or 3;each J^(C) is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, C₁₋₄aliphatic, C₁₋₄ alkoxy or —CN; wherein each said C₁₋₄ aliphatic and eachsaid C₁₋₄ alkoxy is optionally and independently substituted by up to 3instances of C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, —OH or halogen;Q, G and Z are each independently N, S or O, wherein at least two of Q,G and Z are N; q is 0, 1 or 2;R¹⁰ is C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally and independently substituted with 0-3occurrences of R¹⁵, phenyl optionally and independently substituted with0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵ or3-8 membered heterocyclyl optionally and independently substituted with0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵; wherein each of said 5- to 6-membered heteroarylring and each of said 3-8 membered heterocyclyl contains up to 3 ringheteroatoms independently selected from N, O or S;R¹¹ is H, —NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)R^(1a), —SO₂R^(b2),—SR^(b2), halo, —OCF₃, —CN, hydroxyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-2 occurrences of R^(b2), C₂₋₆ alkynyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-2 occurrences of R^(b2);C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally and independently substituted with 0-5 occurrencesof R¹⁵, C₁₋₆ alkoxy optionally and independently substituted with 0-3occurrences of R¹⁵, phenyl optionally and independently substituted with0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵ or3-8 membered heterocyclyl optionally and independently substituted with0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵; wherein each of said 5- to 6-membered heteroaryland each of said 3-8 membered heterocyclyl contains up to 3 ringheteroatoms independently selected from N, O or S; orwhen R¹⁰ is a substituent of Z, R¹⁰ and R¹¹, taken together with Z andthe carbon to which R¹¹ is attached form a 3 to 10-membered heterocyclicring optionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences ofR¹⁵; wherein each of said 3 to 10 membered heterocyclyl contains up to 3ring heteroatoms independently selected from N, O or S;R¹⁵ is halo, —OR^(b2), —SR^(b2), —NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)R^(b2),—C(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2), —NR^(b2)C(O)OR^(b2), —OC(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2)—, C₂₋₄alkenoxy, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl optionally and independently substituted with0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸, phenyl optionally and independently substitutedwith 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸ or 3-10 memberedheterocyclyl optionally and independently substituted with 0-3occurrences of R¹⁸; wherein each of said 3-10 membered heterocyclylcontains up to 3 ring heteroatoms independently selected from N, O or S;R^(15a) is C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl optionally and independently substituted with0-3 occurrences of R⁸, phenyl optionally and independently substitutedwith 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸ or 3-10 memberedheterocyclyl optionally and independently substituted with 0-3occurrences of R¹⁸; wherein each of said 5- or 6-membered heteroarylring and each of said 3-10 membered heterocyclyl contains up to 3 ringheteroatoms independently selected from N, O or S;each R¹⁸ is independently selected from halo, hydroxyl, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkyl or phenyl;R^(a2) is hydrogen, —C(O)R^(b2), C₁₋₆ alkyl or C₁₋₆ haloalkyl; andR^(b2) is hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl or C₁₋₆ haloalkyl.

In some embodiments of Formula I, W is absent and the compound is one ofFormula IIA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:

wherein J^(B) is a C₁₋₇ alkyl chain optionally substituted by up to 9instances of fluorine. In some embodiments of Formula IIA, J^(B) is aC₁₋₄ alkyl chain, optionally substituted by up to 5 instances offluorine. In other embodiments, J^(B) is a C₁₋₂ alkyl chain, optionallysubstituted by up to 5 instances of fluorine. In still other instances,J^(B) is an ethyl chain, optionally substituted by either 3 or 5instances of fluorine.

In some embodiments of Formula I, W is a ring B and the compound is oneof Formula IIB, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:

In some embodiments of Formula IIB, n is an integer selected from 1 or 2and each J^(B) is independently selected from halogen, a C₁₋₄ alkyl,—OR^(B) or —OR^(B1). In other embodiments, each J^(B) is independentlyselected from halogen atoms. In still other embodiments, each J^(B) isindependently selected from fluoro or chloro. In yet other embodiments,each J^(B) is fluoro.

In some embodiments of Formula IIB, each J^(B) is a C₁₋₄ alkyl. In someof these embodiments, J^(B) is ethyl or methyl. In some embodiments,J^(B) is methyl.

In some embodiments of Formula IIB, n is 0.

In some embodiments of Formula IIB, n is 1.

In some embodiments of Formula IIB, n is 1 and J^(B) is independentlyselected from halogen, a C₁₋₄ alkyl, —OR^(B) or —OR^(B1). In some ofthese embodiments, J^(B) is halogen. In some embodiments, J^(B) ischloro or fluoro. In other embodiments, J^(B) is fluoro. In still otherembodiments, J^(B) is C₁₋₄ alkyl. In still other embodiments, J^(B) ismethyl or ethyl.

In some embodiments of Formula IIB, n is 2 and each J^(B) is a halogenatom. In some of these embodiments, each J^(B) is independently selectedfrom chloro or fluoro. In other embodiments, one J^(B) is fluoro and theother J^(B) is chloro. In still other embodiments, each J^(B) is fluoro.

In some embodiments of Formula IIB, ring B is phenyl. In some of theseembodiments, n is 1 or 2. In some of these embodiments, a J^(B) is orthoto the attachment of the methylene linker between ring B and the core ofthe molecule, and the J^(B) is halogen. In some of these embodiments,J^(B) is chloro. In other embodiments, J^(B) is fluoro.

In some embodiments of Formula IIB, ring B is a 6-membered heteroarylring. In other embodiments, ring B is a pyridyl ring. In still otherembodiments, ring B is a pyrimidinyl ring.

In some embodiments of Formula IIB, ring B is a C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl ring.

In some embodiments of Formula I, Formula IIA or Formula IIB, G, Z and Qare each N.

In some embodiments of Formula I or Formula IIB, the compound is one ofFormula III, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or any ofits tautomers:

In some embodiments of Formula I, Formula IIA, Formula IIB and FormulaIII, R¹¹ is H, NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)R^(15a),—SO₂R^(b2), —SR^(b2), halo, —OCF₃, —CN, hydroxyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-2 occurrences of R^(b2),C₂₋₆ alkynyl optionally and independently substituted with 0-2occurrences of R^(b2); C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally and independentlysubstituted with 0-5 occurrences of R¹⁵, C₁₋₆ alkoxy optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, phenyl optionallyand independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, 5- or6-membered heteroaryl optionally and independently substituted with 0-3occurrences of R¹⁵, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl optionally and independentlysubstituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵ or 3-8 membered heterocyclyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵. Insome further embodiments, R¹¹ is H or C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-5 occurrences of R¹⁵. In some furtherembodiments, R¹¹ is C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally substituted with 0-5occurrences of R¹⁵. In some further embodiments, R¹¹ is methyloptionally substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵. In some furtherembodiments, R¹¹ is methyl optionally substituted with 0-3 occurrencesof R¹⁵, and R¹⁵ is halo (e.g., fluoro). In some further embodiments, R¹¹is methyl optionally substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, and R¹⁵ isfluoro. In some further embodiments, R¹¹ is unsubstituted methyl. Insome further embodiments, R¹¹ is methyl substituted with 2 occurrencesof R¹⁵. In some further embodiments, R¹¹ is methyl substituted with 2occurrences of R¹⁵ and R¹⁵ is halo. In some further embodiments, R¹¹ is—CF₂H. In some embodiments, R¹¹ is methyl substituted with 3 occurrencesof R¹⁵. In some embodiments, R¹¹ is methyl substituted with 3occurrences of R¹⁵ and R¹⁵ is halo. In some embodiments, R¹¹ is —CF₃.

In some embodiments of Formula I, Formula IIA, Formula IIB and FormulaIII, R¹¹ is ethyl substituted with 0-5 occurrences of R¹⁵. In somefurther embodiments, R¹¹ is ethyl substituted with 5 occurrences of R¹⁵and R¹⁵ is halo. In some further embodiments, R¹¹ is ethyl substitutedwith 5 occurrences of R¹⁵ and R¹⁵ is fluoro.

In some embodiments of Formula III, n is an integer selected from 1 or 2and each J^(B) is independently selected from halogen, a C₁₋₄ alkyl,—OR^(B) or —OR^(B1). In other embodiments, each J^(B) is independentlyselected from halogen atoms. In still other embodiments, each J^(B) isindependently selected from fluoro or chloro. In yet other embodiments,each J^(B) is fluoro.

In some embodiments of Formula III, each J^(B) is a C₁₋₄ alkyl. In someof these embodiments, J^(B) is ethyl or methyl. In some embodiments,J^(B) is methyl.

In some embodiments of Formula III, n is 0.

In some embodiments of Formula III, n is 1.

In some embodiments of Formula III, n is 1 and each J^(B) isindependently selected from halogen, a C₁₋₄ alkyl, —OR^(B) or —OR^(B1).In some of these embodiments, J^(B) is halogen. In some embodiments,J^(B) is chloro or fluoro. In other embodiments, J^(B) is fluoro. Instill other embodiments, J^(B) is C₁₋₄ alkyl. In still otherembodiments, J^(B) is methyl or ethyl.

In some embodiments of Formula III, n is 2 and each J^(B) is a halogenatom. In some of these embodiments, each J^(B) is independently selectedfrom chloro or fluoro. In other embodiments, one J^(B) is fluoro and theother J^(B) is chloro. In still other embodiments, each J^(B) is fluoro.

In some embodiments of Formula III, ring B is phenyl. In some of theseembodiments, n is 1 or 2. In some of these embodiments, a J^(B) is orthoto the attachment of the methylene linker between ring B and the core ofthe molecule, and the J^(B) is halogen. In some of these embodiments,J^(B) is chloro. In other embodiments, J^(B) is fluoro.

In some embodiments of Formula III, ring B is a 6-membered heteroarylring. In other embodiments, ring B is a pyridyl ring. In still otherembodiments, ring B is a pyrimidinyl ring.

In some embodiments of Formula III, ring B is a C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl ring.

In some embodiments of Formula I, Formula IIA, Formula IIB and FormulaIII, q is 0. In some of these embodiments, R¹¹ is C₁₋₆ alkyl optionallyand independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵. In somefurther embodiments, R¹¹ is methyl optionally and independentlysubstituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵ and R¹⁵ is halo (e.g., fluoro).In some further embodiments, R¹¹ is methyl independently substitutedwith 2 occurrences of R¹⁵ and R¹⁵ is halo (e.g., fluoro). In someembodiments, R¹¹ is methyl independently substituted with 3 occurrencesof R¹⁵ and R¹⁵ is halo (e.g., fluoro).

In some embodiments of Formula I, Formula IIA, Formula IIB and FormulaIII, the core formed by rings E and A is selected from:

wherein the C atom with a symbol * represents the attachment point tothe ring containing G, Z, and Q and the C atom with a symbol **represents the point of attachment of the 2 instances of J. In some ofthese embodiments, each instance of J^(C) is hydrogen.

In some embodiments of Formula I, Formula IIA, Formula IIB and FormulaIII, the core formed by rings E and A is selected from:

In some of these embodiments, each instance of J^(C) is hydrogen.

In some embodiments of Formula I, Formula IIA, Formula IIB and FormulaIII, Q, G and

In some embodiments of Formula I, the compound is one of Formula IV, ora pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:

wherein:Each Y is independently selected from N, NJ^(c), CH, or CJ^(c);Each X is either N, NJ^(c), CH, or CJ^(c);wherein a maximum of 3 instances of X and Y are simultaneously N orNJ^(c);J^(c) is halo, CN, or C₁₋₃alkyl optionally substituted with 1 to 3 halo;Each J^(B) is independently selected from halo or C₁₋₄alkyl;n is 0, 1, 2, or 3;R¹⁰ is C₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groupsindependently selected from halo, —C(O)R^(b2), phenyl, and 5- or6-membered heteroaryl, wherein the phenyl and 5- or 6-memberedheteroaryl are optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halo or C₁₋₄alkyl,wherein the heteroaryl includes 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms independentlyselected from N, O, and S;q is 0 or 1;R¹¹ is H, halo, —NR^(a2)R^(b2), C₁₋₄alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl,or C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, wherein the C₁₋₄alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl,and C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl are each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3groups independently selected from halo, wherein the heteroaryl includes1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms independently selected from N, O, and S;R^(a2) is hydrogen or C₁₋₄ alkyl; andR^(b2) is hydrogen or C₁₋₄ alkyl.

In some embodiments of Formula I, the compound is one of Formula V, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:

Wherein:Y is N or CH;Each J^(B) is independently selected from halo or C₁₋₄alkyl;n is 0, 1, 2, or 3;R¹¹ is H, halo, —NR^(a2)R^(b2), C₁₋₄alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl,or C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, wherein the C₁₋₄alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl,and C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl are each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3groups independently selected from halo;R^(a2) is hydrogen or C₁₋₄ alkyl; andR^(b2) is hydrogen or C₁₋₄ alkyl.

In some embodiments of Formula I, the compound is one of Formula VI, ora pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:

Wherein:Y is N or CH;Each J^(B) is independently selected from halo or C₁₋₄alkyl;n is 0, 1, 2, or 3;R¹¹ is H, halo, —NR^(a2)R^(b2), C₁₋₄alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl,or C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, wherein the C₁₋₄alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl,and C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl are each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3groups independently selected from halo;R^(a2) is hydrogen or C₁₋₄ alkyl; andR^(b2) is hydrogen or C₁₋₄ alkyl.

In some embodiments of Formulas IV, V and VI, R¹¹ is C₁₋₄alkyloptionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halo.

In some embodiments, the compounds of Formula I are selected from thoselisted in Table I.

TABLE I

I-1

I-2

I-3

I-4

I-5

I-6

I-7

I-8

I-9

I-10

I-11

I-12

I-13

I-14

I-15

I-16

I-17

I-18

I-19

I-20

I-21

I-22

I-23

I-24

I-25

I-26

I-27

I-28

I-29

I-30

I-31

I-32

I-33

I-34

I-35

I-36

I-37

I-38

I-39

I-41

I-42

I-47

I-48

I-50

I-51

I-53

I-54

I-56

I-57

I-58

I-59

I-60

I-62

I-63

I-64

I-65

I-66

I-67

I-68

I-70

I-71

I-72In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I is either in its neutralform or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt.Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts of the Invention.

The phrase “pharmaceutically acceptable salt,” as used herein, refers topharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic salts of a compound ofFormula I. The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of a compound ofFormula I are used in medicine. Salts that are not pharmaceuticallyacceptable may, however, be useful in the preparation of a compound ofFormula I or of their pharmaceutically acceptable salts. Apharmaceutically acceptable salt may involve the inclusion of anothermolecule such as an acetate ion, a succinate ion or other counter ion.The counter ion may be any organic or inorganic moiety that stabilizesthe charge on the parent compound. Furthermore, a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt may have more than one charged atom in its structure.Instances where multiple charged atoms are part of the pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt can have multiple counter ions. Hence, apharmaceutically acceptable salt can have one or more charged atomsand/or one or more counter ion.

Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds described hereininclude those derived from the compounds with inorganic acids, organicacids or bases. In some embodiments, the salts can be prepared in situduring the final isolation and purification of the compounds. In otherembodiments the salts can be prepared from the free form of the compoundin a separate synthetic step.

When a compound of Formula I is acidic or contains a sufficiently acidicbioisostere, suitable “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refers tosalts prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic basesincluding inorganic bases and organic bases. Salts derived frominorganic bases include aluminum, ammonium, calcium, copper, ferric,ferrous, lithium, magnesium, manganic salts, manganous, potassium,sodium, zinc and the like. Particular embodiments include ammonium,calcium, magnesium, potassium and sodium salts. Salts derived frompharmaceutically acceptable organic non-toxic bases include salts ofprimary, secondary and tertiary amines, substituted amines includingnaturally occurring substituted amines, cyclic amines and basic ionexchange resins, such as arginine, betaine, caffeine, choline, N, Ndibenzylethylenediamine, diethylamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol,2-dimethylaminoethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine,N-ethylmorpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, glucamine, glucosamine, histidine,hydrabamine, isopropylamine, lysine, methylglucamine, morpholine,piperazine, piperidine, polyamine resins, procaine, purines,theobromine, triethylamine, trimethylamine tripropylamine, tromethamineand the like.

When a compound of Formula I is basic or contains a sufficiently basicbioisostere, salts may be prepared from pharmaceutically acceptablenon-toxic acids, including inorganic and organic acids. Such acidsinclude acetic, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, camphorsulfonic, citric,ethanesulfonic, fumaric, gluconic, glutamic, hydrobromic, hydrochloric,isethionic, lactic, maleic, malic, mandelic, methanesulfonic, mucic,nitric, pamoic, pantothenic, phosphoric, succinic, sulfuric, tartaric,p-toluenesulfonic acid and the like. Particular embodiments includecitric, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, maleic, phosphoric, sulfuric andtartaric acids. Other exemplary salts include, but are not limited, tosulfate, citrate, acetate, oxalate, chloride, bromide, iodide, nitrate,bisulfate, phosphate, acid phosphate, isonicotinate, lactate,salicylate, acid citrate, tartrate, oleate, tannate, pantothenate,bitartrate, ascorbate, succinate, maleate, gentisinate, fumarate,gluconate, glucuronate, saccharate, formate, benzoate, glutamate,methanesulfonate, ethanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate,and pamoate (i.e., 1,1′-methylene-bis-(2-hydroxy-3-naphthoate)) salts.

The preparation of the pharmaceutically acceptable salts described aboveand other typical pharmaceutically acceptable salts is more fullydescribed by Berg et al., “Pharmaceutical Salts,” J. Pharm. Sci.,1977:66:1-19, incorporated here by reference in its entirety.

In addition to the compounds described herein, their pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts may also be employed in compositions to treat orprevent the herein identified disorders.

Pharmaceutical Compositions and Methods of Administration.

The compounds herein disclosed, and their pharmaceutically acceptablesalts thereof may be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions or“formulations”.

A typical formulation is prepared by mixing a compound of Formula I, ora pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a carrier, diluent orexcipient. Suitable carriers, diluents and excipients are well known tothose skilled in the art and include materials such as carbohydrates,waxes, water soluble and/or swellable polymers, hydrophilic orhydrophobic materials, gelatin, oils, solvents, water, and the like. Theparticular carrier, diluent or excipient used will depend upon the meansand purpose for which a compound of Formula I is being formulated.Solvents are generally selected based on solvents recognized by personsskilled in the art as safe (GRAS-Generally Regarded as Safe) to beadministered to a mammal. In general, safe solvents are non-toxicaqueous solvents such as water and other non-toxic solvents that aresoluble or miscible in water. Suitable aqueous solvents include water,ethanol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycols (e.g., PEG400, PEG300),etc. and mixtures thereof. The formulations may also include other typesof excipients such as one or more buffers, stabilizing agents,antiadherents, surfactants, wetting agents, lubricating agents,emulsifiers, binders, suspending agents, disintegrants, fillers,sorbents, coatings (e.g. enteric or slow release) preservatives,antioxidants, opaquing agents, glidants, processing aids, colorants,sweeteners, perfuming agents, flavoring agents and other known additivesto provide an elegant presentation of the drug (i.e., a compound ofFormula I or pharmaceutical composition thereof) or aid in themanufacturing of the pharmaceutical product (i.e., medicament).

The formulations may be prepared using conventional dissolution andmixing procedures. For example, the bulk drug substance (i.e., acompound of Formula I, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or astabilized form of the compound, such as a complex with a cyclodextrinderivative or other known complexation agent) is dissolved in a suitablesolvent in the presence of one or more of the excipients describedabove. A compound having the desired degree of purity is optionallymixed with pharmaceutically acceptable diluents, carriers, excipients orstabilizers, in the form of a lyophilized formulation, milled powder, oran aqueous solution. Formulation may be conducted by mixing at ambienttemperature at the appropriate pH, and at the desired degree of purity,with physiologically acceptable carriers. The pH of the formulationdepends mainly on the particular use and the concentration of compound,but may range from about 3 to about 8. When the agent described hereinis a solid amorphous dispersion formed by a solvent process, additivesmay be added directly to the spray-drying solution when forming themixture such as the additive is dissolved or suspended in the solutionas a slurry which can then be spray dried. Alternatively, the additivesmay be added following spray-drying process to aid in the forming of thefinal formulated product.

The compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereofis typically formulated into pharmaceutical dosage forms to provide aneasily controllable dosage of the drug and to enable patient compliancewith the prescribed regimen. Pharmaceutical formulations of a compoundof Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, may beprepared for various routes and types of administration. Various dosageforms may exist for the same compound, since different medicalconditions may warrant different routes of administration.

The amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carriermaterial to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon thesubject treated and the particular mode of administration. For example,a time-release formulation intended for oral administration to humansmay contain approximately 1 to 1000 mg of active material compoundedwith an appropriate and convenient amount of carrier material which mayvary from about 5 to about 95% of the total compositions(weight:weight). The pharmaceutical composition can be prepared toprovide easily measurable amounts for administration. For example, anaqueous solution intended for intravenous infusion may contain fromabout 3 to 500 μg of the active ingredient per milliliter of solution inorder that infusion of a suitable volume at a rate of about 30 mL/hr canoccur. As a general proposition, the initial pharmaceutically effectiveamount of the inhibitor administered will be in the range of about0.01-100 mg/kg per dose, namely about 0.1 to 20 mg/kg of patient bodyweight per day, with the typical initial range of compound used being0.3 to 15 mg/kg/day.

The term “therapeutically effective amount” as used herein means thatamount of active compound or pharmaceutical agent that elicits thebiological or medicinal response in a tissue, system, animal or humanthat is being sought by a researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor orother clinician. The therapeutically or pharmaceutically effectiveamount of the compound to be administered will be governed by suchconsiderations, and is the minimum amount necessary to ameliorate, cureor treat the disease or disorder or one or more of its symptoms.

The pharmaceutical compositions of Formula I will be formulated, dosed,and administered in a fashion, i.e., amounts, concentrations, schedules,course, vehicles, and route of administration, consistent with goodmedical practice. Factors for consideration in this context include theparticular disorder being treated, the particular mammal being treated,the clinical condition of the individual patient, the cause of thedisorder, the site of delivery of the agent, the method ofadministration, the scheduling of administration, and other factorsknown to medical practitioners, such as the age, weight, and response ofthe individual patient.

The term “prophylactically effective amount” refers to an amounteffective in preventing or substantially lessening the chances ofacquiring a disease or disorder or in reducing the severity of thedisease or disorder before it is acquired or reducing the severity ofone or more of its symptoms before the symptoms develop. Roughly,prophylactic measures are divided between primary prophylaxis (toprevent the development of a disease) and secondary prophylaxis (wherebythe disease has already developed and the patient is protected againstworsening of this process).

Acceptable diluents, carriers, excipients, and stabilizers are thosethat are nontoxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrationsemployed, and include buffers such as phosphate, citrate, and otherorganic acids; antioxidants including ascorbic acid and methionine;preservatives (such as octadecyldimethylbenzyl ammonium chloride;hexamethonium chloride; benzalkonium chloride, benzethonium chloride;phenol, butyl or benzyl alcohol; alkyl parabens such as methyl or propylparaben; catechol; resorcinol; cyclohexanol; 3-pentanol; and m-cresol);proteins, such as serum albumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins;hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; amino acids such asglycine, glutamine, asparagine, histidine, arginine, or lysine;monosaccharides, disaccharides, and other carbohydrates includingglucose, mannose, or dextrins; chelating agents such as EDTA; sugarssuch as sucrose, mannitol, trehalose or sorbitol; salt-formingcounter-ions such as sodium; metal complexes (e.g. Zn-proteincomplexes); and/or non-ionic surfactants such as TWEEN™, PLURONICS™ orpolyethylene glycol (PEG). The active pharmaceutical ingredients mayalso be entrapped in microcapsules prepared, for example, bycoacervation techniques or by interfacial polymerization, e.g.,hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules andpoly-(methylmethacylate) microcapsules, respectively; in colloidal drugdelivery systems (for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres,microemulsions, nanoparticles and nanocapsules) or in macroemulsions.Such techniques are disclosed in Remington's: The Science and Practiceof Pharmacy, 21^(st) Edition, University of the Sciences inPhiladelphia, Eds., 2005 (hereafter “Remington's”).

“Controlled drug delivery systems” supply the drug to the body in amanner precisely controlled to suit the drug and the conditions beingtreated. The primary aim is to achieve a therapeutic drug concentrationat the site of action for the desired duration of time. The term“controlled release” is often used to refer to a variety of methods thatmodify release of drug from a dosage form. This term includespreparations labeled as “extended release”, “delayed release”, “modifiedrelease” or “sustained release”. In general, one can provide forcontrolled release of the agents described herein through the use of awide variety of polymeric carriers and controlled release systemsincluding erodible and non-erodible matrices, osmotic control devices,various reservoir devices, enteric coatings and multiparticulate controldevices.

“Sustained-release preparations” are the most common applications ofcontrolled release. Suitable examples of sustained-release preparationsinclude semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containingthe compound, which matrices are in the form of shaped articles, e.g.films, or microcapsules. Examples of sustained-release matrices includepolyesters, hydrogels (for example, poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate),or poly(vinylalcohol)), polylactides (U.S. Pat. No. 3,773,919),copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma-ethyl-L-glutamate,non-degradable ethylene-vinyl acetate, degradable lactic acid-glycolicacid copolymers, and poly-D-(−)-3-hydroxybutyric acid.

“Immediate-release preparations” may also be prepared. The objective ofthese formulations is to get the drug into the bloodstream and to thesite of action as rapidly as possible. For instance, for rapiddissolution, most tablets are designed to undergo rapid disintegrationto granules and subsequent deaggregation to fine particles. Thisprovides a larger surface area exposed to the dissolution medium,resulting in a faster dissolution rate.

Agents described herein can be incorporated into an erodible ornon-erodible polymeric matrix controlled release device. By an erodiblematrix is meant aqueous-erodible or water-swellable or aqueous-solublein the sense of being either erodible or swellable or dissolvable inpure water or requiring the presence of an acid or base to ionize thepolymeric matrix sufficiently to cause erosion or dissolution. Whencontacted with the aqueous environment of use, the erodible polymericmatrix imbibes water and forms an aqueous-swollen gel or matrix thatentraps the agent described herein. The aqueous-swollen matrix graduallyerodes, swells, disintegrates or dissolves in the environment of use,thereby controlling the release of a compound described herein to theenvironment of use. One ingredient of this water-swollen matrix is thewater-swellable, erodible, or soluble polymer, which may generally bedescribed as an osmopolymer, hydrogel or water-swellable polymer. Suchpolymers may be linear, branched, or cross linked. The polymers may behomopolymers or copolymers. In certain embodiments, they may besynthetic polymers derived from vinyl, acrylate, methacrylate, urethane,ester and oxide monomers. In other embodiments, they can be derivativesof naturally occurring polymers such as polysaccharides (e.g. chitin,chitosan, dextran and pullulan; gum agar, gum arabic, gum karaya, locustbean gum, gum tragacanth, carrageenans, gum ghatti, guar gum, xanthangum and scleroglucan), starches (e.g. dextrin and maltodextrin),hydrophilic colloids (e.g. pectin), phosphatides (e.g. lecithin),alginates (e.g. ammonium alginate, sodium, potassium or calciumalginate, propylene glycol alginate), gelatin, collagen, andcellulosics. Cellulosics are cellulose polymer that has been modified byreaction of at least a portion of the hydroxyl groups on the sacchariderepeat units with a compound to form an ester-linked or an ether-linkedsubstituent. For example, the cellulosic ethyl cellulose has an etherlinked ethyl substituent attached to the saccharide repeat unit, whilethe cellulosic cellulose acetate has an ester linked acetatesubstituent. In certain embodiments, the cellulosics for the erodiblematrix comprises aqueous-soluble and aqueous-erodible cellulosics caninclude, for example, ethyl cellulose (EC), methylethyl cellulose (MEC),carboxymethyl cellulose (CMC), CMEC, hydroxyethyl cellulose (HEC),hydroxypropyl cellulose (HPC), cellulose acetate (CA), cellulosepropionate (CP), cellulose butyrate (CB), cellulose acetate butyrate(CAB), CAP, CAT, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose (HPMC), HPMCP, HPMCAS,hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate trimellitate (HPMCAT), andethylhydroxy ethylcellulose (EHEC). In certain embodiments, thecellulosics comprises various grades of low viscosity (MW less than orequal to 50,000 daltons, for example, the Dow Methocel™ series E5,E15LV, E50LV and K100LY) and high viscosity (MW greater than 50,000daltons, for example, E4MCR, E10MCR, K4M, K15M and K100M and theMethocel™ K series) HPMC. Other commercially available types of HPMCinclude the Shin Etsu Metolose 90SH series.

Other materials useful as the erodible matrix material include, but arenot limited to, pullulan, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol,polyvinyl acetate, glycerol fatty acid esters, polyacrylamide,polyacrylic acid, copolymers of ethacrylic acid or methacrylic acid(EUDRAGIT®, Rohm America, Inc., Piscataway, N.J.) and other acrylic acidderivatives such as homopolymers and copolymers of butylmethacrylate,methylmethacrylate, ethylmethacrylate, ethylacrylate,(2-dimethylaminoethyl) methacrylate, and (trimethylaminoethyl)methacrylate chloride.

Alternatively, the agents of the present invention may be administeredby or incorporated into a non-erodible matrix device. In such devices,an agent described herein is distributed in an inert matrix. The agentis released by diffusion through the inert matrix. Examples of materialssuitable for the inert matrix include insoluble plastics (e.g., methylacrylate-methyl methacrylate copolymers, polyvinyl chloride,polyethylene), hydrophilic polymers (e.g. ethyl cellulose, celluloseacetate, cross linked polyvinylpyrrolidone (also known ascrospovidone)), and fatty compounds (e.g. carnauba wax, microcrystallinewax, and triglycerides). Such devices are described further inRemington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th edition (2000).

As noted above, the agents described herein may also be incorporatedinto an osmotic control device. Such devices generally include a corecontaining one or more agents as described herein and a water permeable,non-dissolving and non-eroding coating surrounding the core whichcontrols the influx of water into the core from an aqueous environmentof use so as to cause drug release by extrusion of some or all of thecore to the environment of use. In certain embodiments, the coating ispolymeric, aqueous-permeable, and has at least one delivery port. Thecore of the osmotic device optionally includes an osmotic agent whichacts to imbibe water from the surrounding environment via such asemi-permeable membrane. The osmotic agent contained in the core of thisdevice may be an aqueous-swellable hydrophilic polymer or it may be anosmogen, also known as an osmagent. Pressure is generated within thedevice which forces the agent(s) out of the device via an orifice (of asize designed to minimize solute diffusion while preventing the build-upof a hydrostatic pressure head). Non limiting examples of osmoticcontrol devices are disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No.09/495,061.

The amount of water-swellable hydrophilic polymers present in the coremay range from about 5 to about 80 wt % (including for example, 10 to 50wt %). Non limiting examples of core materials include hydrophilic vinyland acrylic polymers, polysaccharides such as calcium alginate,polyethylene oxide (PEO), polyethylene glycol (PEG), polypropyleneglycol (PPG), poly (2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate), poly (acrylic) acid,poly (methacrylic) acid, polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP) and cross linkedPVP, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), PVA/PVP copolymers and PVA/PVP copolymerswith hydrophobic monomers such as methyl methacrylate, vinyl acetate,and the like, hydrophilic polyurethanes containing large PEO blocks,sodium croscarmellose, carrageenan, hydroxyethyl cellulose (HEC),hydroxypropyl cellulose (HPC), hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose (HPMC),carboxymethyl cellulose (CMC) and carboxyethyl cellulose (CEC), sodiumalginate, polycarbophil, gelatin, xanthan gum, and sodium starchglycolate. Other materials include hydrogels comprising interpenetratingnetworks of polymers that may be formed by addition or by condensationpolymerization, the components of which may comprise hydrophilic andhydrophobic monomers such as those just mentioned. Water-swellablehydrophilic polymers include but are not limited to PEO, PEG, PVP,sodium croscarmellose, HPMC, sodium starch glycolate, polyacrylic acidand cross linked versions or mixtures thereof.

The core may also include an osmogen (or osmagent). The amount ofosmogen present in the core may range from about 2 to about 70 wt %(including, for example, from 10 to 50 wt %). Typical classes ofsuitable osmogens are water-soluble organic acids, salts and sugars thatare capable of imbibing water to thereby effect an osmotic pressuregradient across the barrier of the surrounding coating. Typical usefulosmogens include but are not limited to magnesium sulfate, magnesiumchloride, calcium chloride, sodium chloride, lithium chloride, potassiumsulfate, sodium carbonate, sodium sulfite, lithium sulfate, potassiumchloride, sodium sulfate, mannitol, xylitol, urea, sorbitol, inositol,raffinose, sucrose, glucose, fructose, lactose, citric acid, succinicacid, tartaric acid, and mixtures thereof. In certain embodiments, theosmogen is glucose, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, xylitol, sodiumchloride, including combinations thereof.

The rate of drug delivery is controlled by such factors as thepermeability and thickness of the coating, the osmotic pressure of thedrug-containing layer, the degree of hydrophilicity of the hydrogellayer, and the surface area of the device. Those skilled in the art willappreciate that increasing the thickness of the coating will reduce therelease rate, while any of the following will increase the release rate:increasing the permeability of the coating; increasing thehydrophilicity of the hydrogel layer; increasing the osmotic pressure ofthe drug-containing layer; or increasing the device's surface area.

In certain embodiments, entrainment of particles of agents describedherein in the extruding fluid during operation of such osmotic device isdesirable. For the particles to be well entrained, the agent drug formis dispersed in the fluid before the particles have an opportunity tosettle in the tablet core. One means of accomplishing this is by addinga disintegrant that serves to break up the compressed core into itsparticulate components. Non limiting examples of standard disintegrantsinclude materials such as sodium starch glycolate (e. g., Explotab™CLV), microcrystalline cellulose (e. g., Avicel™), microcrystallinesilicified cellulose (e. g., ProSolv™) and croscarmellose sodium (e. g.,Ac-Di-Sol), and other disintegrants known to those skilled in the art.Depending upon the particular formulation, some disintegrants workbetter than others. Several disintegrants tend to form gels as theyswell with water, thus hindering drug delivery from the device.Non-gelling, non-swelling disintegrants provide a more rapid dispersionof the drug particles within the core as water enters the core. Incertain embodiments, non-gelling, non-swelling disintegrants are resins,for example, ion-exchange resins. In one embodiment, the resin isAmberlite™ IRP 88 (available from Rohm and Haas, Philadelphia, Pa.).When used, the disintegrant is present in amounts ranging from about1-25% of the core agent.

Another example of an osmotic device is an osmotic capsule. The capsuleshell or portion of the capsule shell can be semipermeable. The capsulecan be filled either by a powder or liquid consisting of an agentdescribed herein, excipients that imbibe water to provide osmoticpotential, and/or a water-swellable polymer, or optionally solubilizingexcipients. The capsule core can also be made such that it has a bilayeror multilayer agent analogous to the bilayer, trilayer or concentricgeometries described above.

Another class of osmotic device useful in this invention comprisescoated swellable tablets, for example, as described in EP378404. Coatedswellable tablets comprise a tablet core comprising an agent describedherein and a swelling material, preferably a hydrophilic polymer, coatedwith a membrane, which contains holes, or pores through which, in theaqueous use environment, the hydrophilic polymer can extrude and carryout the agent. Alternatively, the membrane may contain polymeric or lowmolecular weight water-soluble porosigens. Porosigens dissolve in theaqueous use environment, providing pores through which the hydrophilicpolymer and agent may extrude. Examples of porosigens are water-solublepolymers such as HPMC, PEG, and low molecular weight compounds such asglycerol, sucrose, glucose, and sodium chloride. In addition, pores maybe formed in the coating by drilling holes in the coating using a laseror other mechanical means. In this class of osmotic devices, themembrane material may comprise any film-forming polymer, includingpolymers which are water permeable or impermeable, providing that themembrane deposited on the tablet core is porous or containswater-soluble porosigens or possesses a macroscopic hole for wateringress and drug release. Embodiments of this class of sustained releasedevices may also be multilayered, as described, for example, inEP378404.

When an agent described herein is a liquid or oil, such as a lipidvehicle formulation, for example as described in WO05/011634, theosmotic controlled-release device may comprise a soft-gel or gelatincapsule formed with a composite wall and comprising the liquidformulation where the wall comprises a barrier layer formed over theexternal surface of the capsule, an expandable layer formed over thebarrier layer, and a semipermeable layer formed over the expandablelayer. A delivery port connects the liquid formulation with the aqueoususe environment. Such devices are described, for example, in U.S. Pat.Nos. 6,419,952, 6,342,249, 5,324,280, 4,672,850, 4,627,850, 4,203,440,and 3,995,631.

As further noted above, the agents described herein may be provided inthe form of microparticulates, generally ranging in size from about 10μm to about 2 mm (including, for example, from about 100 μm to 1 mm indiameter). Such multiparticulates may be packaged, for example, in acapsule such as a gelatin capsule or a capsule formed from anaqueous-soluble polymer such as HPMCAS, HPMC or starch; dosed as asuspension or slurry in a liquid; or they may be formed into a tablet,caplet, or pill by compression or other processes known in the art. Suchmultiparticulates may be made by any known process, such as wet- anddry-granulation processes, extrusion/spheronization, roller-compaction,melt-congealing, or by spray-coating seed cores. For example, in wet-and dry-granulation processes, the agent described herein and optionalexcipients may be granulated to form multiparticulates of the desiredsize.

The agents can be incorporated into microemulsions, which generally arethermodynamically stable, isotropically clear dispersions of twoimmiscible liquids, such as oil and water, stabilized by an interfacialfilm of surfactant molecules (Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology,New York: Marcel Dekker, 1992, volume 9). For the preparation ofmicroemulsions, surfactant (emulsifier), co-surfactant (co-emulsifier),an oil phase and a water phase are necessary. Suitable surfactantsinclude any surfactants that are useful in the preparation of emulsions,e.g., emulsifiers that are typically used in the preparation of creams.The co-surfactant (or “co-emulsifier”) is generally selected from thegroup of polyglycerol derivatives, glycerol derivatives and fattyalcohols. Preferred emulsifier/co-emulsifier combinations are generallyalthough not necessarily selected from the group consisting of: glycerylmonostearate and polyoxyethylene stearate; polyethylene glycol andethylene glycol palmitostearate; and caprilic and capric triglyceridesand oleoyl macrogolglycerides. The water phase includes not only waterbut also, typically, buffers, glucose, propylene glycol, polyethyleneglycols, preferably lower molecular weight polyethylene glycols (e.g.,PEG 300 and PEG 400), and/or glycerol, and the like, while the oil phasewill generally comprise, for example, fatty acid esters, modifiedvegetable oils, silicone oils, mixtures of mono- di- and triglycerides,mono- and di-esters of PEG (e.g., oleoyl macrogol glycerides), etc.

The compounds described herein can be incorporated intopharmaceutically-acceptable nanoparticle, nanosphere, and nanocapsuleformulations (Delie and Blanco-Prieto, 2005, Molecule 10:65-80).Nanocapsules can generally entrap compounds in a stable and reproducibleway. To avoid side effects due to intracellular polymeric overloading,ultrafine particles (sized around 0.1 m) can be designed using polymersable to be degraded in vivo (e.g. biodegradable polyalkyl-cyanoacrylatenanoparticles). Such particles are described in the prior art.

Implantable devices coated with a compound of this invention are anotherembodiment of the present invention. The compounds may also be coated onimplantable medical devices, such as beads, or co-formulated with apolymer or other molecule, to provide a “drug depot”, thus permittingthe drug to be released over a longer time period than administration ofan aqueous solution of the drug. Suitable coatings and the generalpreparation of coated implantable devices are described in U.S. Pat.Nos. 6,099,562; 5,886,026; and 5,304,121. The coatings are typicallybiocompatible polymeric materials such as a hydrogel polymer,polymethyldisiloxane, polycaprolactone, polyethylene glycol, polylacticacid, ethylene vinyl acetate, and mixtures thereof. The coatings mayoptionally be further covered by a suitable topcoat of fluorosilicone,polysaccharides, polyethylene glycol, phospholipids or combinationsthereof to impart controlled release characteristics in the composition.

The formulations include those suitable for the administration routesdetailed herein. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unitdosage form and may be prepared by any of the methods well known in theart of pharmacy. Techniques and formulations generally are found inRemington's. Such methods include the step of bringing into associationthe active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or moreaccessory ingredients. In general the formulations are prepared byuniformly and intimately bringing into association the active ingredientwith liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then,if necessary, shaping the product.

The terms “administer”, “administering” or “administration” in referenceto a compound, composition or formulation of the invention meansintroducing the compound into the system of the animal in need oftreatment. When a compound of the invention is provided in combinationwith one or more other active agents, “administration” and its variantsare each understood to include concurrent and/or sequential introductionof the compound and the other active agents.

The compositions described herein may be administered systemically orlocally, e.g.: orally (e.g. using capsules, powders, solutions,suspensions, tablets, sublingual tablets and the like), by inhalation(e.g. with an aerosol, gas, inhaler, nebulizer or the like), to the ear(e.g. using ear drops), topically (e.g. using creams, gels, liniments,lotions, ointments, pastes, transdermal patches, etc.), ophthalmically(e.g. with eye drops, ophthalmic gels, ophthalmic ointments), rectally(e.g. using enemas or suppositories), nasally, buccally, vaginally (e.g.using douches, intrauterine devices, vaginal suppositories, vaginalrings or tablets, etc.), via an implanted reservoir or the like, orparenterally depending on the severity and type of the disease beingtreated. The term “parenteral” as used herein includes, but is notlimited to, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-articular,intra-synovial, intrasternal, intrathecal, intrahepatic, intralesionaland intracranial injection or infusion techniques. Preferably, thecompositions are administered orally, intraperitoneally orintravenously.

The pharmaceutical compositions described herein may be orallyadministered in any orally acceptable dosage form including, but notlimited to, capsules, tablets, aqueous suspensions or solutions. Liquiddosage forms for oral administration include, but are not limited to,pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions,suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active compounds,the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in theart such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agentsand emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethylcarbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propyleneglycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular,cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils),glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fattyacid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Besides inert diluents,the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents,emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfumingagents.

Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets,pills, powders, and granules. In such solid dosage forms, the activecompound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically acceptableexcipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphateand/or a) fillers or extenders such as starches, lactose, sucrose,glucose, mannitol, and silicic acid, b) binders such as, for example,carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidinone,sucrose, and acacia, c) humectants such as glycerol, d) disintegratingagents such as agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch,alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, e) solutionretarding agents such as paraffin, f) absorption accelerators such asquaternary ammonium compounds, g) wetting agents such as, for example,cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate, h) absorbents such as kaolinand bentonite clay, and i) lubricants such as talc, calcium stearate,magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate,and mixtures thereof. Tablets may be uncoated or may be coated by knowntechniques including microencapsulation to mask an unpleasant taste orto delay disintegration and adsorption in the gastrointestinal tract andthereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, atime delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearatealone or with a wax may be employed. A water soluble taste maskingmaterial such as hydroxypropyl-methylcellulose orhydroxypropyl-cellulose may be employed.

Formulations of a compound of Formula I that are suitable for oraladministration may be prepared as discrete units such as tablets, pills,troches, lozenges, aqueous or oil suspensions, dispersible powders orgranules, emulsions, hard or soft capsules, e.g. gelatin capsules,syrups or elixirs. Formulations of a compound intended for oral use maybe prepared according to any method known to the art for the manufactureof pharmaceutical compositions.

Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable machinethe active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as a powder orgranules, optionally mixed with a binder, lubricant, inert diluent,preservative, surface active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may bemade by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered activeingredient moistened with an inert liquid diluent.

Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsuleswherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, forexample, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin, or as softgelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with watersoluble carrier such as polyethyleneglycol or an oil medium, for examplepeanut oil, liquid paraffin, or olive oil.

The active compounds can also be in microencapsulated form with one ormore excipients as noted above.

When aqueous suspensions are required for oral use, the activeingredient is combined with emulsifying and suspending agents. Ifdesired, certain sweetening and/or flavoring agents may be added. Syrupsand elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, for exampleglycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations mayalso contain a demulcent, a preservative, flavoring and coloring agentsand antioxidant.

Sterile injectable forms of the compositions described herein (e.g. forparenteral administration) may be aqueous or oleaginous suspension.These suspensions may be formulated according to techniques known in theart using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents.The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectablesolution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally-acceptable diluent orsolvent, for example as a solution in 1,3-butanediol. Among theacceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water,Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition,sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent orsuspending medium. For this purpose, any bland fixed oil may be employedincluding synthetic mono- or di-glycerides. Fatty acids, such as oleicacid and its glyceride derivatives are useful in the preparation ofinjectables, as are natural pharmaceutically-acceptable oils, such asolive oil or castor oil, especially in their polyoxyethylated versions.These oil solutions or suspensions may also contain a long-chain alcoholdiluent or dispersant, such as carboxymethyl cellulose or similardispersing agents which are commonly used in the formulation ofpharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms including emulsions andsuspensions. Other commonly used surfactants, such as Tweens, Spans andother emulsifying agents or bioavailability enhancers which are commonlyused in the manufacture of pharmaceutically acceptable solid, liquid, orother dosage forms may also be used for the purposes of injectableformulations.

Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending a compound of Formula Iin a vegetable oil, for example arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil orcoconut oil, or in mineral oil such as liquid paraffin. The oilysuspensions may contain a thickening agent, for example beeswax, hardparaffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents such as those set forthabove, and flavoring agents may be added to provide a palatable oralpreparation. These compositions may be preserved by the addition of ananti-oxidant such as butylated hydroxyanisol or alpha-tocopherol.

Aqueous suspensions of a compound of Formula I contain the activematerials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture ofaqueous suspensions. Such excipients include a suspending agent, such assodium carboxymethylcellulose, croscarmellose, povidone,methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcelluose, sodium alginate,polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia, and dispersing orwetting agents such as a naturally occurring phosphatide (e.g.,lecithin), a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid(e.g., polyoxyethylene stearate), a condensation product of ethyleneoxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol (e.g.,heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol), a condensation product of ethylene oxidewith a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and a hexitol anhydride(e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate). The aqueous suspension mayalso contain one or more preservatives such as ethyl or n-propylp-hydroxy-benzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoringagents and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.

The injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, byfiltration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporatingsterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which canbe dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectablemedium prior to use.

In order to prolong the effect of a compound described herein, it isoften desirable to slow the absorption of the compound from subcutaneousor intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of aliquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material with poor watersolubility. The rate of absorption of the compound then depends upon itsrate of dissolution that, in turn, may depend upon crystal size andcrystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterallyadministered compound form is accomplished by dissolving or suspendingthe compound in an oil vehicle. Injectable depot forms are made byforming microencapsulated matrices of the compound in biodegradablepolymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending upon the ratio ofcompound to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed,the rate of compound release can be controlled. Examples of otherbiodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides).Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping thecompound in liposomes or microemulsions that are compatible with bodytissues.

The injectable solutions or microemulsions may be introduced into apatient's bloodstream by local bolus injection. Alternatively, it may beadvantageous to administer the solution or microemulsion in such a wayas to maintain a constant circulating concentration of the instantcompound. In order to maintain such a constant concentration, acontinuous intravenous delivery device may be utilized. An example ofsuch a device is the Deltec CADD-PLUS™ model 5400 intravenous pump.

Compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are preferablysuppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds describedherein with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoabutter, beeswax, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which aresolid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature andtherefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the activecompound. Other formulations suitable for vaginal administration may bepresented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or sprays.

The pharmaceutical compositions described herein may also beadministered topically, especially when the target of treatment includesareas or organs readily accessible by topical application, includingdiseases of the eye, the ear, the skin, or the lower intestinal tract.Suitable topical formulations are readily prepared for each of theseareas or organs.

Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration of a compounddescribed herein include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels,powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches. The active componentis admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptablecarrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required.Ophthalmic formulation, eardrops, and eye drops are also contemplated asbeing within the scope of this invention. Additionally, the presentinvention contemplates the use of transdermal patches, which have theadded advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to thebody. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispensing thecompound in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used toincrease the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can becontrolled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or bydispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel. Topical applicationfor the lower intestinal tract can be effected in a rectal suppositoryformulation (see above) or in a suitable enema formulation.Topically-transdermal patches may also be used.

For topical applications, the pharmaceutical compositions may beformulated in a suitable ointment containing the active componentsuspended or dissolved in one or more carriers. Carriers for topicaladministration of the compounds of this invention include, but are notlimited to, mineral oil, liquid petrolatum, white petrolatum, propyleneglycol, polyoxyethylene, polyoxypropylene compound, emulsifying wax andwater. Alternatively, the pharmaceutical compositions can be formulatedin a suitable lotion or cream containing the active components suspendedor dissolved in one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.Suitable carriers include, but are not limited to, mineral oil, sorbitanmonostearate, polysorbate 60, cetyl esters wax, cetearyl alcohol, 2octyldodecanol, benzyl alcohol and water.

For ophthalmic use, the pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated asmicronized suspensions in isotonic, pH adjusted sterile saline, or,preferably, as solutions in isotonic, pH adjusted sterile saline, eitherwith or without a preservative such as benzylalkonium chloride.Alternatively, for ophthalmic uses, the pharmaceutical compositions maybe formulated in an ointment such as petrolatum. For treatment of theeye or other external tissues, e.g., mouth and skin, the formulationsmay be applied as a topical ointment or cream containing the activeingredient(s) in an amount of, for example, 0.075 to 20% w/w. Whenformulated in an ointment, the active ingredients may be employed witheither an oil-based, paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base.

Alternatively, the active ingredients may be formulated in a cream withan oil-in-water cream base. If desired, the aqueous phase of the creambase may include a polyhydric alcohol, i.e. an alcohol having two ormore hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane 1,3-diol,mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol (including PEG 400)and mixtures thereof. The topical formulations may desirably include acompound which enhances absorption or penetration of the activeingredient through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of suchdermal penetration enhancers include dimethyl sulfoxide and relatedanalogs.

The oily phase of emulsions prepared using a compound of Formula I maybe constituted from known ingredients in a known manner. While the phasemay comprise merely an emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent), itdesirably comprises a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat oran oil or with both a fat and an oil. A hydrophilic emulsifier may beincluded together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as astabilizer. In some embodiments, the emulsifier includes both an oil anda fat. Together, the emulsifier(s) with or without stabilizer(s) make upthe so-called emulsifying wax, and the wax together with the oil and fatmake up the so-called emulsifying ointment base which forms the oilydispersed phase of the cream formulations. Emulgents and emulsionstabilizers suitable for use in the formulation of a compound of FormulaI include Tween™-60, Span™-80, cetostearyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol,myristyl alcohol, glyceryl mono-stearate and sodium lauryl sulfate.

The pharmaceutical compositions may also be administered by nasalaerosol or by inhalation. Such compositions are prepared according totechniques well-known in the art of pharmaceutical formulation and maybe prepared as solutions in saline, employing benzyl alcohol or othersuitable preservatives, absorption promoters to enhance bioavailability,fluorocarbons, and/or other conventional solubilizing or dispersingagents. Formulations suitable for intrapulmonary or nasal administrationhave a particle size for example in the range of 0.1 to 500 micros(including particles in a range between 0.1 and 500 microns inincrements microns such as 0.5, 1, 30, 35 microns, etc.) which isadministered by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage or byinhalation through the mouth so as to reach the alveolar sacs.

The pharmaceutical composition (or formulation) for use may be packagedin a variety of ways depending upon the method used for administeringthe drug. Generally, an article for distribution includes a containerhaving deposited therein the pharmaceutical formulation in anappropriate form. Suitable containers are well-known to those skilled inthe art and include materials such as bottles (plastic and glass),sachets, ampoules, plastic bags, metal cylinders, and the like. Thecontainer may also include a tamper-proof assemblage to preventindiscreet access to the contents of the package. In addition, thecontainer has deposited thereon a label that describes the contents ofthe container. The label may also include appropriate warnings.

The formulations may be packaged in unit-dose or multi-dose containers,for example sealed ampoules and vials, and may be stored in afreeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of thesterile liquid carrier, for example water, for injection immediatelyprior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions areprepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kindpreviously described. Preferred unit dosage formulations are thosecontaining a daily dose or unit daily sub-dose, as herein above recited,or an appropriate fraction thereof, of the active ingredient.

In another aspect, a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof may be formulated in a veterinary compositioncomprising a veterinary carrier. Veterinary carriers are materialsuseful for the purpose of administering the composition and may besolid, liquid or gaseous materials which are otherwise inert. In theveterinary art and are compatible with the active ingredient. Theseveterinary compositions may be administered parenterally, orally or byany other desired route.

Therapeutic Methods

In a third aspect, the invention relates to the treatment of certaindisorders by using sGC stimulators, either alone or in combination, ortheir pharmaceutically acceptable salts or pharmaceutical compositionscomprising them, in a patient in need thereof.

The present disclosure relates to stimulators of soluble guanylatecyclase (sGC), pharmaceutical formulations thereof and their use, aloneor in combination with one or more additional agents, for treatingand/or preventing various diseases, wherein an increase in theconcentration of NO or an increase in the concentration of cGMP might bedesirable. The diseases that can be treated include but are not limitedto pulmonary hypertension, arterial hypertension, heart failure,atherosclerosis, inflammation, thrombosis, renal fibrosis and failure,liver cirrhosis, erectile dysfunction, female sexual disorders,disorders related to diabetes, ocular disorders and other relatedcardiovascular disorders.

Increased concentration of cGMP leads to vasodilation, inhibition ofplatelet aggregation and adhesion, anti-hypertensive effects,anti-remodeling effects, anti-apoptotic effects, anti-inflammatoryeffects and neuronal signal transmission effects. Thus, sGC stimulatorsmay be used to treat and/or prevent a range of diseases and disorders,including but not limited to a peripheral, pulmonary, hepatic, liver,cardiac or cerebrovascular/endothelial disorders or conditions, aurogenital-gynecological or sexual disorder or condition, athromboembolic disease, an ischemic disease, a fibrotic disorder, atopical or skin disorder, a pulmonary or respiratory disorder, a renalor hepatic disorder, a metabolic disorder, atherosclerosis, or a lipidrelated disorder.

In other embodiments, the compounds here disclosed are sGC stimulatorsthat may be useful in the prevention and/or treatment of diseases anddisorders characterized by undesirable reduced bioavailability of and/orsensitivity to NO, such as those associated with conditions of oxidativestress or nitrosative stress.

In other embodiments, the compounds here disclosed are sGC stimulatorsthat may be useful in the prevention and/or treatment of diseases anddisorders characterized by increased neuroinflammation. One embodimentof the invention is a method of decreasing neuroinflammation in asubject in need thereof by administering to the subject any one of thecompounds of Formula I, IIA, IIB, II, III, IV, V, VI, I-1, I-2, I-3,I-4, I-5, I-6, I-7, I-8, I-9, I-10, I-11, I-12, I-13, I-14, I-15, I-16,I-17 through I-39, I-41, I-42, I-47, I-48, I-50, I-51, I-53, I-54, I- 56through I-60, I-62 through I-68, I-70, I-7, and I-72 or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In particular the diseases anddisorders is a CNS disease or disorder as described in sections(9)-(16), below.

In other embodiments, the compounds here disclosed are sGC stimulatorsthat may be useful in the prevention and/or treatment of diseases anddisorders characterized by increased neurotoxicity. One embodiment ofthe invention is a method of reducing neurotoxicity in a subject in needthereof by administering to the subject any one of the compounds ofFormula I, IIA, IIB, II, III, IV, V, VI, I-1, I-2, I-3, I-4, I-5, I-6,I-7, I-8, I-9, I-10, I-11, I-12, I-13, I-14, I-15, I-16, I-17 throughI-39, I-41, I-42, I-47, I-48, I-50, I-51, I-53, I-54, I-56 through I-60,I-62 through I-68, I-70, I-7, and I-72, or a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt thereof. In particular the diseases and disorders is a CNS diseaseor disorder as described in sections (9)-(16), below.

In other embodiments, the compounds here disclosed are sGC stimulatorsthat may be useful in the prevention and/or treatment of diseases anddisorders characterized by impaired neurorengeneration. One embodimentof the invention is a method of restoring neuroregeneration in a subjectin need thereof by administering to the subject any one of the compoundsof Formula I, IIA, IIB, II, III, IV, V, VI, I-1, I-2, I-3, I-4, I-5,I-6, I-7, I-8, I-9, I-10, I-11, I-12, I-13, I-14, I-15, or I-16, I-17through 1-39, I-41, I-42, I-47, I-48, I-50, I-51, I-53, I-54, I-56through 1-60, I-62 through 1-68, I-70, I-7, and I-72, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In particular the diseases anddisorders is a CNS disease or disorder as described in sections(9)-(16), below.

In other embodiments, the compounds here disclosed are sGC stimulatorsthat may be useful in the prevention and/or treatment of diseases anddisorders characterized by impaired synaptic function. One embodiment ofthe invention is a method of restoring synaptic function in a subject inneed thereof by administering to the subject any one of the compounds ofFormula I, IIA, IIB, II, III, IV, V, VI, I-1, I-2, I-3, I-4, I-5, I-6,I-7, I-8, I-9, I-10, I-11, I-12, I-13, I-14, I-15, or I-16, I-17 through1-39, I-41, I-42, I-47, I-48, I-50, I-51, I-53, I-54, I-56 through I-60,I-62 through 1-68, I-70, I-7, and I-72, or a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt thereof. In particular the diseases and disorders is a CNS diseaseor disorder as described in sections (9)-(16), below.

In other embodiments, the compounds here disclosed are sGC stimulatorsthat may be useful in the prevention and/or treatment of diseases anddisorders characterized by downregulated neurotransmitters. Oneembodiment of the invention is a method of normalizing neurotransmitterin a subject in need thereof by administering to the subject any one ofthe compounds of Formula I, IIA, IIB, II, III, IV, V, VI, I-1, I-2, I-3,I-4, I-5, I-6, I-7, I-8, I-9, I-10, I-11, I-12, I-13, I-14, I-15, or1-16, I-17 through 1-39, I-41, I-42, I-47, I-48, I-50, I-51, I-53, I-54,I-56 through 1-60, I-62 through 1-68, I-70, I-7, and I-72, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In particular the diseases anddisorders is a CNS disease or disorder as described in sections(9)-(16), below. Specifically, the disease is Alzheimer's Disease.Specifically, the disease is Mixed Dementia.

In other embodiments, the compounds here disclosed are sGC stimulatorsthat may be useful in the prevention and/or treatment of diseases anddisorders characterized by impaired cerebral blood flow. One embodimentof the invention is a method of restoring cerebral blood flow in asubject in need thereof by administering to the subject any one of thecompounds of Formula I, IIA, IIB, II, III, IV, V, VI, I-1, I-2, I-3,I-4, I-5, I-6, I-7, I-8, I-9, I-10, I-11, I-12, I-13, I-14, I-15, or1-16, I-17 through 1-39, I-41, I-42, I-47, I-48, I-50, I-51, I-53, I-54,I-56 through 1-60, I-62 through 1-68, I-70, I-7, and I-72, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In particular the diseases anddisorders is a CNS disease or disorder as described in sections(9)-(16), below. Specifically, the disease is Vascular Dementia orAlzheimer's Disease. Specifically, the disease is Mixed Dementia. Inother embodiments CNS disorder is selected from either traumatic (closedor open, penetrating head injuries), traumatic brain injury (TBI), ornontraumatic (stroke, aneurism, hypoxia) injury to the brain orcognitive impairment or dysfunction resulting from brain injuries orneurodegenerative disorders.

In other embodiments, the compounds here disclosed are sGC stimulatorsthat may be useful in the prevention and/or treatment of diseases anddisorders characterized by increased neurodegeneration. One embodimentof the invention is a method of decreasing neurodegeneration in asubject in need thereof by administering to the subject any one of thecompounds of Formula I, IIA, IIB, II, III, IV, V, VI, I-1, I-2, I-3,I-4, I-5, I-6, I-7, I-8, I-9, I-10, I-11, I-12, I-13, I-14, I-15, or1-16, I-17 through 1-39, I-41, I-42, I-47, I-48, I-50, I-51, I-53, I-54,I-56 through 1-60, I-62 through 1-68, I-70, I-7, and I-72, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In particular the diseases anddisorders is a CNS disease or disorder as described in sections(9)-(16), below.

In other embodiments, the compounds here disclosed are sGC stimulatorsare neuroprotective. In particular, the compounds of Formula I, IIA,IIB, II, III, IV, V, VI, I-1, I-2, I-3, I-4, I-5, I-6, I-7, I-8, I-9,I-10, I-11, I-12, I-13, I-14, I-15, or I-16, I-17 through 1-39, I-41,I-42, I-47, I-48, I-50, I-51, I-53, I-54, I-56 through 1-60, I-62through 1-68, I-70, I-7, and I-72, or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof may be useful protect the neurons in a subject in need thereof.In particular, the diseases and disorders is a CNS disease or disorderas described in sections (9)-(16), below.

In other embodiments, the compounds here disclosed are sGC stimulatorsthat may be useful in the prevention and/or treatment orphan painindications. One embodiment of the invention is a method of treating anorphan pain indication in a subject in need thereof by administering tothe subject any one of the compounds of Formula I, IIA, IIB, II, III,IV, V, VI, I-1, I-2, I-3, I-4, I-5, I-6, I-7, I-8, I-9, I-10, I-11,I-12, I-13, I-14, I-15, or I-16, I-17 through 1-39, I-41, I-42, I-47,I-48, I-50, I-51, I-53, I-54, I-56 through 1-60, I-62 through 1-68,I-70, I-7, and I-72, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. Inparticular, the orphan pain indication is selected fromAcetazolamide-responsive myotonia, Autoerythrocyte sensitizationsyndrome, Autosomal dominant Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease type 2V,Autosomal dominant intermediate Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease withneuropathic pain, Autosomal recessive limb-girdle muscular dystrophytype 2A, Channelopathy-associated congenital insensitivity to pain,Chronic pain requiring intraspinal analgesia, Complex regional painsyndrome, Complex regional pain syndrome type 1, Complex regional painsyndrome type 2, Congenital insensitivity to pain with hyperhidrosis,Congenital insensitivity to pain with severe intellectual disability,Congenital insensitivity to pain-hypohidrosis syndrome, Diffusepalmoplantar keratoderma with painful fissures, Familial episodic painsyndrome, Familial episodic pain syndrome with predominantly lower limbinvolvement, Familial episodic pain syndrome with predominantly upperbody involvement, Hereditary painful callosities, Hereditary sensory andautonomic neuropathy type 4, Hereditary sensory and autonomic neuropathytype 5, Hereditary sensory and autonomic neuropathy type 7, Interstitialcystitis, Painful orbital and systemic neurofibromas-marfanoid habitussyndrome, Paroxysmal extreme pain disorder, Persistent idiopathic facialpain, Qualitative or quantitative defects of calpain, and Tolosa-Huntsyndrome.

Throughout this disclosure, the terms “hypertension”, “arterialhypertension” or “high blood pressure (HBP)” are used interchangeableand refer to an extremely common and highly preventable chroniccondition in which blood pressure (BP) in the arteries is higher thannormal. If not properly controlled, it represents a significant riskfactor for several serious cardiovascular and renal conditions.Hypertension may be a primary disease, called “essential hypertension”or “idiopathic hypertension”, or it may be caused by other diseases, inwhich case it is classified as “secondary hypertension”. Essentialhypertension accounts for 90-95% of all cases.

As used herein, the term “resistant hypertension” refers to hypertensionthat remains above goal blood pressure (usually less than 140/90 mmHg,although a lower goal of less than 130/80 mmHg is recommended forpatients with comorbid diabetes or kidney disease), in spite ofconcurrent use of three antihypertensive agents belonging to differentantihypertensive drug classes. People who require four or more drugs tocontrol their blood pressure are also considered to have resistanthypertension. Hypertension is an extremely common comorbid condition indiabetes, affecting ˜20-60% of patients with diabetes, depending onobesity, ethnicity, and age. This type of hypertension is hereinreferred to as “diabetic hypertension”. In type 2 diabetes, hypertensionis often present as part of the metabolic syndrome of insulin resistancealso including central obesity and dyslipidemia. In type 1 diabetes,hypertension may reflect the onset of diabetic nephropathy.

“Pulmonary hypertension (PH)”, as used herein, is a diseasecharacterized by sustained elevations of blood pressure in the pulmonaryvasculature (pulmonary artery, pulmonary vein and pulmonarycapillaries), which results in right heart hypertrophy, eventuallyleading to right heart failure and death. Common symptoms of PH includeshortness of breath, dizziness and fainting, all of which areexacerbated by exertion. Without treatment, median life expectancyfollowing diagnosis is 2.8 years. PH exists in many different forms,which are categorized according to their etiology. Categories includepulmonary arterial hypertension (PAH), PH with left heart disease, PHassociated with lung diseases and/or hypoxaemia, PH due to chronicthrombotic and/or embolic disease and miscellaneous PH. PAH is rare inthe general population, but the prevalence increases in association withcertain common conditions such as HIV infection, scleroderma and sicklecell disease. Other forms of PH are generally more common than PAH, and,for instance, the association of PH with chronic obstructive pulmonarydisease (COPD) is of particular concern. Current treatment for pulmonaryhypertension depends on the stage and the mechanism of the disease.

As used herein “heart failure” is a progressive disorder of leftventricular (LV) myocardial remodeling that culminates in a complexclinical syndrome in which impaired cardiac function and circulatorycongestion are the defining features, and results in insufficientdelivery of blood and nutrients to body tissues. The condition occurswhen the heart is damaged or overworked and unable to pump out all theblood that returns to it from the systemic circulation. As less blood ispumped out, blood returning to the heart backs up and fluid builds up inother parts of the body. Heart failure also impairs the kidneys' abilityto dispose of sodium and water, complicating fluid retention further.Heart failure is characterized by autonomic dysfunction, neurohormonalactivation and overproduction of cytokines, which contribute toprogressive circulatory failure. Symptoms of heart failure include:dyspnea (shortness of breath) while exercising or resting and waking atnight due to sudden breathlessness, both indicative of pulmonary edema;general fatigue or weakness, edema of the feet, ankles and legs, rapidweight gain, chronic cough, including that producing mucus or blood.Depending on its clinical presentation, heart failure is classified asde novo, transient or chronic. Acute heart failure, i.e. the rapid orgradual onset of symptoms requiring urgent therapy, may develop de novoor as a result of chronic heart failure becoming decompensated. Diabetesis a common comorbidity in patients with heart failure and is associatedwith poorer outcomes as well as potentially compromising the efficacy oftreatments. Other important comorbidities include systemic hypertension,chronic airflow obstruction, sleep apnea, cognitive dysfunction, anemia,chronic kidney disease and arthritis. Chronic left heart failure isfrequently associated with the development of pulmonary hypertension.The frequency of certain comorbidities varies by gender: among women,hypertension and thyroid disease are more common, while men morecommonly suffer from chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD),peripheral vascular disease, coronary artery disease and renalinsufficiency. Depression is a frequent comorbidity of heart failure andthe two conditions can and often do complicate one another. Cachexia haslong been recognized as a serious and frequent complication of heartfailure, affecting up to 15% of all heart failure patients and beingassociated with poor prognosis. Cardiac cachexia is defined as thenonedematous, nonvoluntary loss of at least 6% of body weight over aperiod of six months.

The term “sleep apnea” refers to the most common of the sleep-disorderedbreathing disorders. It is a condition characterized by intermittent,cyclical reductions or total cessations of airflow, which may or may notinvolve obstruction of the upper airway. There are three types of sleepapnea: obstructive sleep apnea, the most common form, central sleepapnea and mixed sleep apnea.

“Central sleep apnea (CSA)”, is caused by a malfunction in the brain'snormal signal to breathe, rather than physical blockage of the airway.The lack of respiratory effort leads to an increase in carbon dioxide inthe blood, which may rouse the patient. CSA is rare in the generalpopulation, but is a relatively common occurrence in patients withsystolic heart failure.

As used herein, the term “metabolic syndrome”, “insulin resistancesyndrome” or “syndrome X”, refers to a group or clustering of metabolicconditions (abdominal obesity, elevated fasting glucose, “dyslipidemia”(i.e., elevated lipid levels) and elevated blood pressure (HBP)) whichoccur together more often than by chance alone and that together promotethe development of type 2 diabetes and cardiovascular disease. Metabolicsyndrome is characterized by a specific lipid profile of increasedtriglycerides, decreased high-density lipoprotein cholesterol(HDL-cholesterol) and in some cases moderately elevated low-densitylipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-cholesterol) levels, as well as acceleratedprogression of “atherosclerotic disease” due to the pressure of thecomponent risk factors. There are several types of dyslipidemias:“hypercholesterolemia” refers to elevated levels of cholesterol.Familial hypercholesterolemia is a specific form of hypercholesterolemiadue to a defect on chromosome 19 (19p13.1-13.3). “Hyperglyceridemia”refers to elevated levels of glycerides (e.g., “hypertrigliceridemia”involves elevated levels of triglycerides). “Hyperlipoproteinemia”refers to elevated levels of lipoproteins (usually LDL unless otherwisespecified).

As used herein, the term “peripheral vascular disease (PVD)”, alsocommonly referred to as “peripheral arterial disease (PAD)” or“peripheral artery occlusive disease (PAOD)”, refers to the obstructionof large arteries not within the coronary, aortic arch vasculature, orbrain. PVD can result from atherosclerosis, inflammatory processesleading to stenosis, an embolism, or thrombus formation. It causeseither acute or chronic “ischemia (lack of blood supply)”. Often PVD isa term used to refer to atherosclerotic blockages found in the lowerextremity. PVD also includes a subset of diseases classified asmicrovascular diseases resulting from episodal narrowing of the arteries(e.g., “Raynaud's phenomenon”), or widening thereof (erythromelalgia),i.e. vascular spasms.

The term “thrombosis” refers to the formation of a blood clot(“thrombus”) inside a blood vessel, obstructing the flow of bloodthrough the circulatory system. When a blood vessel is injured, the bodyuses platelets (thrombocytes) and fibrin to form a blood clot to preventblood loss. Alternatively, even when a blood vessel is not injured,blood clots may form in the body if the proper conditions presentthemselves. If the clotting is too severe and the clot breaks free, thetraveling clot is now known as an “embolus”. The term “thromboembolism”refers to the combination of thrombosis and its main complication,“embolism”. When a thrombus occupies more than 75% of surface area ofthe lumen of an artery, blood flow to the tissue supplied is reducedenough to cause symptoms because of decreased oxygen (hypoxia) andaccumulation of metabolic products like lactic acid (“gout”). More than90% obstruction can result in anoxia, the complete deprivation ofoxygen, and “infarction”, a mode of cell death.

An “embolism” (plural embolisms) is the event of lodging of an embolus(a detached intravascular mass capable of clogging arterial capillarybeds at a site far from its origin) into a narrow capillary vessel of anarterial bed which causes a blockage (vascular occlusion) in a distantpart of the body. This is not to be confused with a thrombus whichblocks at the site of origin.

A “stroke”, or cerebrovascular accident (CVA), is the rapid loss ofbrain function(s) due to disturbance in the blood supply to the brain.This can be due to “ischemia” (lack of blood flow) caused by blockage(thrombosis, arterial embolism), or a hemorrhage (leakage of blood). Asa result, the affected area of the brain cannot function, which mightresult in an inability to move one or more limbs on one side of thebody, inability to understand or formulate speech, or an inability tosee one side of the visual field. Risk factors for stroke include oldage, hypertension, previous stroke or transient ischemic attack (TIA),diabetes, high cholesterol, cigarette smoking and atrial fibrillation.High blood pressure is the most important modifiable risk factor ofstroke. An “ischemic stroke” is occasionally treated in a hospital withthrombolysis (also known as a “clot buster”), and some hemorrhagicstrokes benefit from neurosurgery. Prevention of recurrence may involvethe administration of antiplatelet drugs such as aspirin anddipyridamole, control and reduction of hypertension, and the use ofstatins. Selected patients may benefit from carotid endarterectomy andthe use of anticoagulants.

“Ischemia” is a restriction in blood supply to tissues, causing ashortage of oxygen and glucose needed for cellular metabolism (to keeptissue alive). Ischemia is generally caused by problems with bloodvessels, with resultant damage to or dysfunction of tissue. It alsomeans local anemia in a given part of a body sometimes resulting fromcongestion (such as vasoconstriction, thrombosis or embolism).

According to the American Psychiatric Association's Diagnostic andStatistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fourth Edition (DSM-IV), theterm “sexual dysfunction” encompasses a series of conditions“characterized by disturbances in sexual desire and in thepsychophysiological changes associated with the sexual response cycle”;while problems of this type are common, sexual dysfunction is onlyconsidered to exist when the problems cause distress for the patient.Sexual dysfunction can be either physical or psychological in origin. Itcan exist as a primary condition, generally hormonal in nature, althoughmost often it is secondary to other medical conditions or to drugtherapy for said conditions. All types of sexual dysfunction can befurther classified as life-long, acquired, situational or generalized(or combinations thereof).

The DSM-IV-TR specifies five major categories of “female sexualdysfunction”: sexual desire/interest disorders; “sexual arousaldisorders (including genital, subjective and combined)”; orgasmicdisorder; dyspareunia and vaginismus; and persistent sexual arousaldisorder.

“Female sexual arousal disorder (FSAD)” is defined as a persistent orrecurring inability to attain or maintain sufficient levels of sexualexcitement, causing personal distress. FSAD encompasses both the lack ofsubjective feelings of excitement (i.e., subjective sexual arousaldisorder) and the lack of somatic responses such as lubrication andswelling (i.e., genital/physical sexual arousal disorder). FSAD may bestrictly psychological in origin, although it generally is caused orcomplicated by medical or physiological factors. Hypoestrogenism is themost common physiologic condition associated with FSAD, which leads tourogenital atrophy and a decrease in vaginal lubrication.

As used herein, “erectile dysfunction (ED)” is a male sexual dysfunctioncharacterized by the inability to develop or maintain an erection of thepenis during sexual performance. A penile erection is the hydrauliceffect of blood entering and being retained in sponge-like bodies withinthe penis. The process is often initiated as a result of sexual arousal,when signals are transmitted from the brain to nerves in the penis.Erectile dysfunction is indicated when an erection is difficult toproduce. The most important organic causes are cardiovascular diseaseand diabetes, neurological problems (for example, trauma fromprostatectomy surgery), hormonal insufficiencies (hypogonadism) and drugside effects.

As used herein, the term “bronchoconstriction” is used to define theconstriction of the airways in the lungs due to the tightening ofsurrounding smooth muscle, with consequent coughing, wheezing, andshortness of breath. The condition has a number of causes, the mostcommon being as well as asthma. Exercise and allergies can bring on thesymptoms in an otherwise asymptomatic individual. Other conditions suchas chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) can also present withbronchoconstriction.

Specific diseases of disorders which may be treated and/or prevented byadministering an sGC stimulator of the invention, include but are notlimited to: hypertension (e.g., diabetic hypertension, arterialhypertension, pulmonary hypertension, resistant hypertension, peripheralartery disease, etc.), heart failure (e.g., left ventricular diastolicdysfunction (LVDD) and left ventricular systolic dysfunction (LVSD),sleep apnea associated with heart failure), arteriosclerotic disease(e.g., atherosclerosis), thromboembolic disorders (e.g., chronicthromboembolic pulmonary hypertension, thrombosis, stroke (inparticular, ischemic stroke), embolism, pulmonary embolism), Alzheimer'sdisease, renal diseases (e.g., renal fibrosis, ischemic renal disease,renal failure, renal insufficiency, chronic kidney disease), hepaticdisease (e.g., liver fibrosis or cirrhosis), respiratory disease (e.g.,pulmonary fibrosis, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease,interstitial lung disease), sexual disorders (e.g., erectiledysfunction, male and female sexual dysfunction, vaginal atrophy),sickle cell anemia, neuro inflammatory diseases or disorders andmetabolic disorders (e.g., lipid related disorders).

Further specific diseases of disorders which may be treated and/orprevented by administering an sGC stimulator of the invention, includebut are not limited to: age-associated memory impairment, mixeddementia, sleep wake disorders, and Sneddon's syndrome.

Further specific diseases of disorders which may be treated and/orprevented by administering an sGC stimulator of the invention, includebut are not limited to: acute pain, central pain syndrome, chemotherapyinduced neuropathy and neuropathic pain, diabetic neuropathy,fibromyalgia, inflammatory pain, neuropathic pain, neuropathic painassociated with a CNS disease, painful diabetic peripheral neuropathy,post-operative pain, tonic pain, and visceral pain.

Further specific diseases of disorders which may be treated and/orprevented by administering an sGC stimulator of the invention, includebut are not limited to: altitude (mountain) sickness, cerebral smallvessel disease, cerebral vasculitis, cerebral vasospasm, diabetic heartfailure (diabetic HF), diabetic angiopathy, diabetic macular edema,diabetic microangiopathies, Heart failure with preserved ejectionfraction (HFpEF), hepatic encephalopathy, moyamoya, non-diabeticnephropathy, and Parkinson's Dysphagia.

Further specific diseases of disorders which may be treated and/orprevented by administering an sGC stimulator of the invention, includebut are not limited to: angina, ataxia telangliectasia, autism spectrumdisorder, chronic fatigue, chronic traumatic encephalopathy (CTE),cognitive impairment associated with diabetes, cognitive impairmentassociated with Multiple Sclerosis, cognitive impairment associated withobstructive sleep apnea, cognitive impairment associated withschizophrenia (CIAS), cognitive impairment associated with sickle cell,concussion, dysphagia, eye fibrosis, Fabry Disease, Gaucher Disease,glioblastoma, inflammation caused by cerebral malaria (SoC),inflammation caused by infectious disease, intellectual disability,microvascular angina, myopic choroidal neovascularization, neuromyelitisoptica, neuropathic pain with Multiple Sclerosis, neuropathic pain withshingles (herpes zoster), neuropathic pain with spine surgery,Parkinson's Dementia, peripheral and autonomic neuropathies, peripheralretinal degeneration, post-traumatic stress syndrome, post herpeticneuralgia, post-operative dementia, proliferative vitroretinopathy,radiation induced fibrosis, radiculopathy, refractory epilepsy, retinalvein occlusion, Sjogren's syndrome, spinal cord injury, spinal muscularatrophy, spinal subluxations, tauopathies, ulcers, and wet age-relatedmacular degeneration.

The compounds of Formula I as well as pharmaceutically acceptable saltsthereof, as stimulators of sGC, are useful in the prevention and/ortreatment of the following types of diseases, conditions and disorderswhich can benefit from sGC stimulation or an upregulation of the NOpathway:

(1) Peripheral, pulmonary, hepatic, kidney, cardiac or cerebralvascular/endothelial disorders/conditions or diseases otherwise relatedto circulation:

-   -   disorders related to high blood pressure and decreased coronary        blood flow such as increased acute and chronic coronary blood        pressure, arterial hypertension and vascular disorder resulting        from cardiac and renal complications (e.g. heart disease,        stroke, cerebral ischemia, renal failure); resistant        hypertension, diabetic hypertension, congestive heart failure;        diastolic or systolic dysfunction; coronary insufficiency;        arrhythmias; reduction of ventricular preload; cardiac        hypertrophy; heart failure/cardiorenal syndrome; portal        hypertension; endothelial dysfunction or injury;    -   thromboembolic disorders and ischemias such as myocardial        infarction, stroke (in particular, ischemic stroke), transient        ischemic attacks (TIAs); obstructive thromboanginitis; stable or        unstable angina pectoris; coronary spasms, variant angina,        Prinzmetal's angina; prevention of restenosis after thrombolysis        therapies; thrombogenic disorders;    -   peripheral arterial disease, peripheral occlusive arterial        disease; peripheral vascular disease; hypertonia; Raynaud's        syndrome or phenomenon, critical limb ischemia, vasculitis;        peripheral embolism; intermittent claudication; vaso-occlusive        crisis; Duchenne and Becker muscular dystrophies;        microcirculation abnormalities; control of vascular leakage or        permeability;    -   shock; sepsis; cardiogenic shock; control of leukocyte        activation; inhibition or modulation of platelet aggregation;    -   pulmonary/respiratory conditions such as pulmonary hypertension,        pulmonary arterial hypertension, and associated pulmonary        vascular remodeling (e.g. localized thrombosis and right heart        hypertrophy); pulmonary hypertonia; primary pulmonary        hypertension, secondary pulmonary hypertension, familial        pulmonary hypertension, sporadic pulmonary hypertension,        pre-capillary pulmonary hypertension, idiopathic pulmonary        hypertension, thrombotic pulmonary arteriopathy, plexogenic        pulmonary arteriopathy; cystic fibrosis; bronchoconstriction or        pulmonary bronchoconstriction; acute respiratory distress        syndrome; lung fibrosis, lung transplant;    -   pulmonary hypertension associated with or related to: left        ventricular dysfunction, hypoxemia, WHO groups I, II, III, IV        and V hypertensions, mitral valve disease, constrictive        pericarditis, aortic stenosis, cardiomyopathy, mediastinal        fibrosis, pulmonary fibrosis, anomalous pulmonary venous        drainage, pulmonary venooclusive disease, pulmonary vasculitis,        collagen vascular disease, congenital heart disease, pulmonary        venous hypertension, interstitial lung disease, sleep-disordered        breathing, sleep apnea, alveolar hypoventilation disorders,        chronic exposure to high altitude, neonatal lung disease,        alveolar-capillary dysplasia, sickle cell disease, other        coagulation disorders, chronic thromboembolism, pulmonary        embolism (due to tumor, parasites or foreign material),        connective tissue disease, lupus, schistosomiasis, sarcoidosis,        chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, asthma, emphysema,        chronic bronchitis, pulmonary capillary hemangiomatosis;        histiocytosis X, lymphangiomatosis and compressed pulmonary        vessels (such as due to adenopathy, tumor or fibrosing        mediastinitis);    -   arterosclerotic diseases or conditions such as atherosclerosis        (e.g., associated with endothelial injury, platelet and monocyte        adhesion and aggregation, smooth muscle proliferation and        migration); restenosis (e.g., developed after thrombolysis        therapies, percutaneous transluminal angioplasties (PTAs),        percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasties (PTCAs) and        bypass); inflammation;    -   cardiovascular disease associated with metabolic syndrome (e.g.,        obesity, dyslipidemia, diabetes, high blood pressure); lipid        related disorders such as dyslipidemia, hypercholesterolemia,        hypertriglyceridemia, sitosterolemia, fatty liver disease, and        hepatitis; preeclampsia; polycystic kidney disease progression;        subcutaneous fat; obesity;    -   liver cirrhosis, associated with chronic liver disease, hepatic        fibrosis, hepatic stellate cell activation, hepatic fibrous        collagen and total collagen accumulation; liver disease of        necro-inflammatory and/or of immunological origin; and        urogenital system disorders, such as renal fibrosis and renal        failure resulting from chronic kidney diseases or insufficiency        (e.g. due to accumulation/deposition and tissue injury,        progressive sclerosis, glomerulonephritis); prostate hypertrophy        systemic sclerosis; cardiac interstitial fibrosis; cardiac        remodeling and fibrosis; cardiac hypertrophy; non-alcoholic        steatohepatitis or NASH;        (2) ischemia, reperfusion damage; ischemia/reperfusion        associated with organ transplant, lung transplant, pulmonary        transplant, cardiac transplant; conserving blood substituents in        trauma patients;        (3) sexual, gynecological and urological disorders of        conditions: erectile dysfunction; impotence; premature        ejaculation; female sexual dysfunction (e.g., female sexual        arousal dysfunction, hypoactive sexual arousal disorder),        vaginal atrophy, dyspaneuria, atrophic vaginitis; benign        prostatic hyperplasia (BPH) or hypertrophy or enlargement,        bladder outlet obstruction; bladder pain syndrome (BPS),        interstitial cystitis (IC), overactive bladder, neurogenic        bladder and incontinence; diabetic nephropathy;        (4) ocular diseases or disorders: glaucoma, retinopathy,        diabetic retinopathy (including proliferative and        non-proliferative), blepharitis, dry eye syndrome, Sjögren's        Syndrome;        (5) hearing diseases or disorders: hearing impairment, partial        or total hearing loss; partial or total deafness; tinnitus;        noise-induced hearing loss;        (6) topical or skin disorders or conditions: dermal fibrosis,        scleroderma, skin fibrosis;        (7) wound healing: for instance in diabetics; microvascular        perfusion improvement (e.g., following injury, to counteract the        inflammatory response in perioperative care), anal fissures,        diabetic ulcers;        (8) other diseases or conditions: cancer metastasis,        osteoporosis, gastroparesis; functional dyspepsia; diabetic        complications, diseases associated with endothelial dysfunction,        and neurologic disorders associated with decreased nitric oxide        production; achalasia or esophageal achalasia.        (9) a CNS disease, health condition or disorder selected from        Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS or Lou        Gehrig's disease), Down syndrome, dementia, vascular dementia,        vascular cognitive impairment, Mixed Dementia, Binswanger's        dementia (subcortical arteriosclerotic encephalopathy), Cerebral        Autosomal-Dominant Arteriopathy with Subcortical Infarcts and        Leukoencephalopathy (CADASIL or CADASIL syndrome),        frontotemporal lobar degeneration or dementia, HIV-associated        dementia (including asymptomatic neurocognitive impairment        (ANI), minor neurocognitive disorder (MND), and HIV-associated        dementia (HAD) (also called AIDS dementia complex [ADC] or HIV        encephalopathy), Lewy body dementia, pre-senile dementia (mild        cognitive impairment, MCI), glaucoma, Huntington's diseases (or        chorea, HD), or a cognitive defect associated with HD; multiple        sclerosis (MS) (including Clinically isolated syndrome (CIS),        Relapsing-remitting MS (RRMS), Primary progressive MS (PPMS),        and Secondary progressive MS (SPMS)) multiple system atrophy        (MSA), Parkinson's disease, Parkinsonism Plus, spinocerebellar        ataxias, Steel-Richardson-Olszewski disease (progressive        supranuclear palsy), attention deficit disorder (ADD) and        attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD);        (10) a CNS disorder or condition selected from Alzheimer's        disease or pre-Alzheimer's disease, mild to moderate Alzheimer's        disease or moderate to severe Alzheimer's disease;        (11) a CNS disorder is selected from either traumatic (closed or        open, penetrating head injuries), traumatic brain injury (TBI,        including, for example, concussions and Chronic traumatic        encephalopathy (CTE)), or nontraumatic (stroke (including        ischemic stroke), aneurism, hypoxia) injury to the brain or        cognitive impairment or dysfunction resulting from brain        injuries or neurodegenerative disorders;        (12) a CNS disease or disorder is selected from dystonias,        including for example, generalized, focal, segmental, sexual,        intermediate, acute dystonic reaction, and genetic/primary        dystonia; and dyskinesias, including for example, acute,        chronic/tardive, and non-motor and levo-dopa induced dyskinesia        (LID);        (13) a CNS disease or disorder is selected from disorders        characterized by a relative reduction in synaptic plasticity and        synaptic processes including, for example, Fragile X, Rhett's        disorder, Williams syndrome, Renpenning's syndrome, autism        spectrum disorders, including autism, Asperger's syndrome,        pervasive development disorder and childhood disintegrative        disorder;        (14) a CNS disorder is neuropathic pain;        (15) a CNS disorder is a psychiatric, mental, mood or affective        disorder selected from a bipolar disorder, schizophrenia,        general psychosis, drug-induced psychosis, a delusional        disorder, schizoaffective disorder, obsessive compulsive        disorder (OCD), a depressive disorder, an anxiety disorder, a        panic disorder, post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD); or        (16) a CNS disorder is selected from chemo brain, levo-dopa        induced addictive behavior, alcoholism, narcotic dependence        (including but not limited to amphetamine, opiates or other        substances) and substance abuse.

In other embodiments of the invention, the compounds of Formula I aswell as pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof are useful in theprevention and/or treatment of the following types of diseases,conditions and disorders which can benefit from sGC stimulation or anupregulation of the NO pathway:

hypertension, resistant hypertension, diabetic hypertension, pulmonaryhypertension (PH), pulmonary arterial hypertension, PH associated withCOPD, chronic airflow obstruction, asthma or pulmonary fibrosis,thrombosis, embolism, thromboembolic disorders, Alzheimer's disease,atherosclerosis, right heart hypertrophy, heart failure, diastolicdysfunction, systolic dysfunction, sleep apnea associated with heartfailure, liver cirrhosis, renal fibrosis, renal failure resulting fromchronic kidney diseases or insufficiency, metabolic disorder,dyslipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia,sitosterolemia, fatty liver disease, hepatitis, erectile dysfunction,female sexual dysfunction, female sexual arousal dysfunction and vaginalatrophy.

In some embodiments, the invention relates to a method of treating adisease, health condition or disorder in a subject, comprisingadministering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of any ofthe above depicted Formulae, or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof, to the subject in need of treatment, wherein the disease,health condition or disorder is selected from one of the diseases listedabove.

In other embodiments the disease, health condition or disorder isselected from a peripheral, pulmonary, hepatic, kidney, cardiac orcerebralvascular/endothelial disorder or condition, or a diseaseotherwise related to circulation selected from: increased acute andchronic coronary blood pressure, arterial hypertension and vasculardisorder resulting from cardiac and renal complications, heart disease,stroke (in particular, ischemic stroke), cerebral ischemia, renalfailure; resistant hypertension, diabetic hypertension, congestive heartfailure; diastolic or systolic dysfunction; coronary insufficiency;arrhythmias; reduction of ventricular preload; cardiac hypertrophy;heart failure/cardiorenal syndrome; portal hypertension; endothelialdysfunction or injury; myocardial infarction; stroke or transientischemic attacks (TIAs); obstructive thromboanginitis; stable orunstable angina pectoris; coronary spasms, variant angina, Prinzmetal'sangina; restenosis as a result of thrombolysis therapies andthrombogenic disorders.

In still other embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder isselected from a peripheral vascular/endothelial disorder or condition ora disease otherwise related to circulation selected from: peripheralarterial disease, peripheral occlusive arterial disease; peripheralvascular disease; hypertonias; Raynaud's syndrome or phenomenon ordisease; critical limb ischemia; vasculitis; peripheral embolism;intermittent claudication; vaso-occlusive crisis; Duchenne and Beckermuscular dystrophies; microcirculation abnormalities; and vascularleakage or permeability issues.

In further embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder is apulmonary disorder or condition or a disease otherwise related tocirculation selected from: pulmonary hypertension; pulmonary arterialhypertension and associated pulmonary vascular remodeling; localizedthrombosis; right heart hypertrophy; pulmonary hypertonia; primarypulmonary hypertension, secondary pulmonary hypertension, familialpulmonary hypertension, sporadic pulmonary hypertension, pre-capillarypulmonary hypertension, idiopathic pulmonary hypertension, thromboticpulmonary arteriopathy, plexogenic pulmonary arteriopathy; cysticfibrosis; bronchoconstriction or pulmonary bronchoconstriction; acuterespiratory distress syndrome; lung fibrosis and lung transplant. Insome of these embodiments, the pulmonary hypertension is pulmonaryhypertension associated with or related to: left ventriculardysfunction, hypoxemia, WHO groups I, II, III, IV and V hypertensions,mitral valve disease, constrictive pericarditis, aortic stenosis,cardiomyopathy, mediastinal fibrosis, pulmonary fibrosis, anomalouspulmonary venous drainage, pulmonary venooclusive disease, pulmonaryvasculitis, collagen vascular disease, congenital heart disease,pulmonary venous hypertension, interstitial lung disease,sleep-disordered breathing, sleep apnea, alveolar hypoventilationdisorders, chronic exposure to high altitude, neonatal lung disease,alveolar-capillary dysplasia, sickle cell disease, coagulationdisorders, chronic thromboembolism; pulmonary embolism, due to tumor,parasites or foreign material; connective tissue disease, lupus,schistosomiasis, sarcoidosis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease,asthma, emphysema, chronic bronchitis, pulmonary capillaryhemangiomatosis; histiocytosis X; lymphangiomatosis and compressedpulmonary vessels due to adenopathy, tumor or fibrosing mediastinitis.

In still other embodiments, the health condition or disorder is avascular or endothelial disorder or condition or a disease otherwiserelated to circulation selected from: arterosclerotic diseases;atherosclerosis, atherosclerosis associated with endothelial injury,atherosclerosis associated with platelet and monocyte adhesion andaggregation, atherosclerosis associated with smooth muscle proliferationand migration; restenosis, restenosis developed after thrombolysistherapies; restenosis developed after percutaneous transluminalangioplasties; restenosis developed after percutaneous transluminalcoronary angioplasties and bypass; inflammation; cardiovascular diseaseassociated with metabolic syndrome, obesity, dyslipidemia, diabetes orhigh blood pressure; lipid related disorders, dyslipidemia,hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, sitosterolemia, fatty liverdisease, and hepatitis; preeclampsia; polycystic kidney diseaseprogression; and subcutaneous fat.

In yet other embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorderselected from liver cirrhosis, liver cirrhosis associated with chronicliver disease, hepatic fibrosis, hepatic stellate cell activation,hepatic fibrous collagen and total collagen accumulation; and liverdisease of necro-inflammatory or of immunological origin.

In further embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder is aurogenital system disorder selected from renal fibrosis; renal failureresulting from chronic kidney diseases or insufficiency; renal failuredue to accumulation or deposition and tissue injury, progressivesclerosis or glomerulonephritis; and prostatic hypertrophy.

In further embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder issystemic sclerosis.

In further embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder is acardiac disorder selected from cardiac interstitial fibrosis; cardiacremodeling and fibrosis and cardiac hypertrophy.

In some embodiments, the disorder is a CNS disease, health condition ordisorder selected from Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateralsclerosis (ALS or Lou Gehrig's disease), Down syndrome, dementia,vascular dementia, Mixed Dementia, vascular cognitive impairment,Binswanger's dementia (subcortical arteriosclerotic encephalopathy),Cerebral Autosomal-Dominant Arteriopathy with Subcortical Infarcts andLeukoencephalopathy (CADASIL or CADASIL syndrome), frontotemporal lobardegeneration or dementia, HIV-associated dementia (includingasymptomatic neurocognitive impairment (ANI), minor neurocognitivedisorder (MND), and HIV-associated dementia (HAD) (also called AIDSdementia complex [ADC] or HIV encephalopathy), Lewy body dementia,pre-senile dementia (mild cognitive impairment, MCI), glaucoma,Huntington's diseases (or chorea, HD), or a cognitive defect associatedwith HD; multiple sclerosis (MS), multiple system atrophy (MSA),Parkinson's disease, Parkinsonism Plus, spinocerebellar ataxias,Steel-Richardson-Olszewski disease (progressive supranuclear palsy),attention deficit disorder (ADD) and attention deficit hyperactivitydisorder (ADHD).

In further embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder is aCNS disorder or condition selected from Alzheimer's disease orpre-Alzheimer's disease, mild to moderate Alzheimer's disease ormoderate to severe Alzheimer's disease.

In other embodiments, the CNS disorder is selected from either traumatic(closed or open, penetrating head injuries), traumatic brain injury(TBI), or nontraumatic (stroke (in particular, ischemic stroke),aneurism, hypoxia) injury to the brain or cognitive impairment ordysfunction resulting from brain injuries or neurodegenerativedisorders.

In other embodiments, the CNS disease or disorder is selected fromdystonias, including for example, generalized, focal, segmental, sexual,intermediate, acute dystonic reaction, and genetic/primary dystonia; anddyskinesias, including for example, acute, chronic/tardive, andnon-motor and levo-dopa induced dyskinesia (LID).

In other embodiments, the CNS disease or disorder is selected fromdisorders characterized by a relative reduction in synaptic plasticityand synaptic processes including, for example, Fragile X, Rhett'sdisorder, Williams syndrome, Renpenning's syndrome, autism spectrumdisorders, including autism, Asperger's syndrome, pervasive developmentdisorder and childhood disintegrative disorder.

In other embodiments, the CNS disorder is neuropathic pain.

In other embodiments, the CNS disorder is a psychiatric, mental, mood oraffective disorder selected from a bipolar disorder, schizophrenia,general psychosis, drug-induced psychosis, a delusional disorder,schizoaffective disorder, obsessive compulsive disorder (OCD), adepressive disorder, an anxiety disorder, a panic disorder,post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD).

In other embodiments, the CNS disorder is selected from chemo brain,levo-dopa induced addictive behavior, alcoholism, narcotic dependence(including but not limited to amphetamine, opiates or other substances)and substance abuse.

In some embodiments, the disease or disorder is achalasia or esophagealachalasia.

In other embodiments, the disease or disorder is non-alcoholicsteatohepatitis or NASH.

In further embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder isselected from ischemia, reperfusion damage; ischemia/reperfusionassociated with organ transplant, lung transplant, pulmonary transplantor cardiac transplant; conserving blood substituents in trauma patients.

In further embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder is asexual, gynecological or urological disorder of condition selected fromerectile dysfunction; impotence; premature ejaculation; female sexualdysfunction; female sexual arousal dysfunction; hypoactive sexualarousal disorder; vaginal atrophy, dyspaneuria, atrophic vaginitis;benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH) or hypertrophy or enlargement;bladder outlet obstruction; bladder pain syndrome (BPS); interstitialcystitis (IC); overactive bladder, neurogenic bladder and incontinence;diabetic nephropathy.

In further embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder isselected from vaginal atrophy, dyspaneuria and atrophic vaginitis.

In further embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder isselected from benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH) or hypertrophy orenlargement; bladder outlet obstruction; bladder pain syndrome (BPS);interstitial cystitis (IC); overactive bladder, neurogenic bladder andincontinence.

In further embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder is asexual, condition selected from erectile dysfunction; impotence;premature ejaculation; female sexual dysfunction; female sexual arousaldysfunction and hypoactive sexual arousal disorder.

In further embodiments, the disease or disorder is diabetic nephropathy.

In further embodiments, the disease, health condition or disorder isDuchenne and Becker muscular dystrophies.

In further embodiments, the disease is an ocular diseases or disorderselected from glaucoma, retinopathy, diabetic retinopathy (includingproliferative and non-proliferative), blepharitis, dry eye syndrome andSjögren's Syndrome.

In further embodiments, the disease is a hearing diseases or disorderselected from hearing impairment, partial or total hearing loss; partialor total deafness; tinnitus; and noise-induced hearing loss.

In further embodiments, the disease is a topical or skin disorders orcondition selected from dermal fibrosis, scleroderma and skin fibrosis.

In further embodiments, the treatment involves wound healing; woundhealing in diabetics; improvement of microvascular perfusion;improvement of microvascular perfusion issues following injury;treatment of anal fissures; and treatment of diabetic ulcers.

In further embodiments, the disease or condition is selected from cancermetastasis; osteoporosis; gastroparesis; functional dyspepsia; diabeticcomplications; diseases associated with endothelial dysfunction andneurologic disorders associated with decreased nitric oxide production.

In further embodiments, the disease or condition is selected fromage-associated memory impairment, mixed dementia, sleep wake disorders,and Sneddon's syndrome.

In further embodiments, the disease or condition is selected from acutepain, central pain syndrome, chemotherapy induced neuropathy andneuropathic pain, diabetic neuropathy, fibromyalgia, Inflammatory pain,neuropathic pain, neuropathic pain associated with a CNS disease,painful diabetic peripheral neuropathy, post-operative pain, tonic pain,and visceral pain.

In further embodiments, the disease or condition is selected fromaltitude (mountain) sickness, cerebral small vessel disease, cerebralvasculitis, cerebral vasospasm, diabetic heart failure (diabetic HF),diabetic angiopathy, diabetic macular edema, diabetic microangiopathies,Heart failure with preserved ejection fraction (HFpEF), hepaticencephalopathy, moyamoya, non-diabetic nephropathy, and Parkinson'sDysphagia.

In further embodiments, the disease or condition is selected fromangina, ataxia telangliectasia, autism spectrum disorder, chronicfatigue, chronic traumatic encephalopathy (CTE), cognitive impairmentassociated with diabetes, cognitive impairment associated with MultipleSclerosis, cognitive impairment associated with obstructive sleep apnea,cognitive impairment associated with schizophrenia (CIAS), cognitiveimpairment associated with sickle cell, concussion, dysphagia, eyefibrosis, Fabry Disease, Gaucher Disease, glioblastoma, inflammationcaused by cerebral malaria (SoC), inflammation caused by infectiousdisease, intellectual disability, microvascular angina, myopic choroidalneovascularization, neuromyelitis optica, neuropathic pain with MultipleSclerosis, neuropathic pain with shingles (herpes zoster), neuropathicpain with spine surgery, Parkinson's Dementia, peripheral and autonomicneuropathies, peripheral retinal degeneration, post-traumatic stresssyndrome, post herpetic neuralgia, post-operative dementia,proliferative vitroretinopathy, radiation induced fibrosis,radiculopathy, refractory epilepsy, retinal vein occlusion, Sjogren'ssyndrome, spinal cord injury, spinal muscular atrophy, spinalsubluxations, tauopathies, ulcers, and wet age-related maculardegeneration.

In further embodiments, the disease or condition is selected from anorphan pain indication. In particular, the orphan pain indication isselected from Acetazolamide-responsive myotonia, Autoerythrocytesensitization syndrome, Autosomal dominant Charcot-Marie-Tooth diseasetype 2V, Autosomal dominant intermediate Charcot-Marie-Tooth diseasewith neuropathic pain, Autosomal recessive limb-girdle musculardystrophy type 2A, Channelopathy-associated congenital insensitivity topain, Chronic pain requiring intraspinal analgesia, Complex regionalpain syndrome, Complex regional pain syndrome type 1, Complex regionalpain syndrome type 2, Congenital insensitivity to pain withhyperhidrosis, Congenital insensitivity to pain with severe intellectualdisability, Congenital insensitivity to pain-hypohidrosis syndrome,Diffuse palmoplantar keratoderma with painful fissures, Familialepisodic pain syndrome, Familial episodic pain syndrome withpredominantly lower limb involvement, Familial episodic pain syndromewith predominantly upper body involvement, Hereditary painfulcallosities, Hereditary sensory and autonomic neuropathy type 4,Hereditary sensory and autonomic neuropathy type 5, Hereditary sensoryand autonomic neuropathy type 7, Interstitial cystitis, Painful orbitaland systemic neurofibromas-marfanoid habitus syndrome, Paroxysmalextreme pain disorder, Persistent idiopathic facial pain, Qualitative orquantitative defects of calpain, and Tolosa-Hunt syndrome.

In another embodiment, compounds of the invention can be delivered inthe form of implanted devices, such as stents. A stent is a mesh ‘tube’inserted into a natural passage/conduit in the body to prevent orcounteract a disease-induced, localized flow constriction. The term mayalso refer to a tube used to temporarily hold such a natural conduitopen to allow access for surgery.

A drug-eluting stent (DES) is a peripheral or coronary stent (ascaffold) placed into narrowed, diseased peripheral or coronary arteriesthat slowly releases a drug to block cell proliferation, usually smoothmuscle cell proliferation. This prevents fibrosis that, together withclots (thrombus), could otherwise block the stented artery, a processcalled restenosis. The stent is usually placed within the peripheral orcoronary artery by an Interventional cardiologist or InterventionalRadiologist during an angioplasty procedure. Drugs commonly used in DESin order to block cell proliferation include paclitaxel or rapamycinanalogues

In some embodiments of the invention, a sGC stimulator of the inventioncan be delivered by means of a drug-eluting stent coated with said sGCstimulator. A drug-eluting stent coated with a sGC stimulator of theinvention may be useful in the prevention of stent restenosis andthrombosis during percutaneous coronary interventions. A drug-elutingstent coated with a sGC stimulator of the invention may be able toprevent smooth cell proliferation as well as to assistre-vascularization and re-generation of the endothelial tissue of theartery in which the stent is inserted.

An alternative to percutaneous coronary intervention for the treatmentof intractable angina due to coronary artery occlusive disease is theprocedure named Coronary Artery Bypass Grafting (CABG). CABG providesonly palliation of an ongoing process that is further complicated by therapid development of graft atherosclerosis. The saphenous vein graft isthe most commonly used conduit in CABG surgery. The long-term clinicalsuccess of venous CABG is hampered for three main reasons: acceleratedgraft atherosclerosis, incomplete endothelialization and thrombosis.

In some embodiments, a sGC stimulator of the invention can be used forthe prevention of saphenous graft failure during CABG. Compounds of theinvention may assist the process of endothelialization and help preventthrombosis. In this indication, the sGC stimulator is delivered locallyin the form of a gel.

The terms, “disease”, “disorder” and “condition” may be usedinterchangeably here to refer to an sGC, cGMP and/or NO mediated medicalor pathological condition.

As used herein, the terms “subject” and “patient” are usedinterchangeably. The terms “subject” and “patient” refer to an animal(e.g., a bird such as a chicken, quail or turkey, or a mammal),specifically a “mammal” including a non-primate (e.g., a cow, pig,horse, sheep, rabbit, guinea pig, rat, cat, dog, and mouse) and aprimate (e.g., a monkey, chimpanzee and a human), and more specificallya human. In some embodiments, the subject is a non-human animal such asa farm animal (e.g., a horse, cow, pig or sheep), or a pet (e.g., a dog,cat, guinea pig or rabbit). In some embodiments, the subject is a human.

The invention also provides a method for treating one of the abovediseases, conditions and disorders in a subject, comprisingadministering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound ofFormula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, to the subjectin need of the treatment. Alternatively, the invention provides the useof a compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof, in the treatment of one of these diseases, conditions anddisorders in a subject in need of the treatment. The invention furtherprovides a method of making or manufacturing a medicament useful fortreating one of these diseases, conditions and disorders comprisingusing a compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof.

The term “biological sample”, as used herein, refers to an in vitro orex vivo sample, and includes, without limitation, cell cultures orextracts thereof; biopsied material obtained from a mammal or extractsthereof; blood, saliva, urine, faeces, semen, tears, lymphatic fluid,ocular fluid, vitreous humour, cerebrospinal fluid (CSF), or other bodyfluids or extracts thereof.

“Treat”, “treating” or “treatment” with regard to a disorder or diseaserefers to alleviating or abrogating the cause and/or the effects of thedisorder or disease. As used herein, the terms “treat”, “treatment” and“treating” refer to the reduction or amelioration of the progression,severity and/or duration of an sGC, cGMP and/or NO mediated condition,or the amelioration of one or more symptoms (preferably, one or morediscernible symptoms) of said condition (i.e. “managing” without“curing” the condition), resulting from the administration of one ormore therapies (e.g., one or more therapeutic agents such as a compoundor composition of the invention). In specific embodiments, the terms“treat”; “treatment” and “treating” refer to the amelioration of atleast one measurable physical parameter of an sGC, cGMP and/or NOmediated condition. In other embodiments the terms “treat”, “treatment”and “treating” refer to the inhibition of the progression of an sGC,cGMP and/or NO mediated condition, either physically by, e.g.,stabilization of a discernible symptom or physiologically by, e.g.,stabilization of a physical parameter, or both.

The term “preventing” as used herein refers to administering amedicament beforehand to avert or forestall the appearance of one ormore symptoms of a disease or disorder. The person of ordinary skill inthe medical art recognizes that the term “prevent” is not an absoluteterm. In the medical art it is understood to refer to the prophylacticadministration of a drug to substantially diminish the likelihood orseriousness of a condition, or symptom of the condition and this is thesense intended in this disclosure. The Physician's Desk Reference, astandard text in the field, uses the term “prevent” hundreds of times.As used therein, the terms “prevent”, “preventing” and “prevention” withregard to a disorder or disease, refer to averting the cause, effects,symptoms or progression of a disease or disorder prior to the disease ordisorder fully manifesting itself.

In one embodiment, the methods of the invention are a preventative or“pre-emptive” measure to a patient, specifically a human, having apredisposition (e.g. a genetic predisposition) to developing an sGC,cGMP and/or NO related disease, disorder or symptom.

In other embodiments, the methods of the invention are a preventative or“pre-emptive” measure to a patient, specifically a human, suffering froma disease, disorder or condition that makes him at risk of developing ansGC, cGMP or NO related disease, disorder or symptom.

The compounds and pharmaceutical compositions described herein can beused alone or in combination therapy for the treatment or prevention ofa disease or disorder mediated, regulated or influenced by sGC, cGMPand/or NO.

Compounds and compositions here disclosed are also useful for veterinarytreatment of companion animals, exotic animals and farm animals,including, without limitation, dogs, cats, mice, rats, hamsters,gerbils, guinea pigs, rabbits, horses, pigs and cattle.

In other embodiments, the invention provides a method of stimulating sGCactivity in a biological sample, comprising contacting said biologicalsample with a compound or composition of the invention. Use of a sGCstimulator in a biological sample is useful for a variety of purposesknown to one of skill in the art. Examples of such purposes include,without limitation, biological assays and biological specimen storage.

Combination Therapies

The compounds and pharmaceutical compositions described herein can beused in combination therapy with one or more additional therapeuticagents. For combination treatment with more than one active agent, wherethe active agents are in separate dosage formulations, the active agentsmay be administered separately or in conjunction. In addition, theadministration of one element may be prior to, concurrent to, orsubsequent to the administration of the other agent.

When co-administered with other agents, e.g., when co-administered withanother pain medication, an “effective amount” of the second agent willdepend on the type of drug used. Suitable dosages are known for approvedagents and can be adjusted by the skilled artisan according to thecondition of the subject, the type of condition(s) being treated and theamount of a compound described herein being used. In cases where noamount is expressly noted, an effective amount should be assumed. Forexample, compounds described herein can be administered to a subject ina dosage range from between about 0.01 to about 10,000 mg/kg bodyweight/day, about 0.01 to about 5000 mg/kg body weight/day, about 0.01to about 3000 mg/kg body weight/day, about 0.01 to about 1000 mg/kg bodyweight/day, about 0.01 to about 500 mg/kg body weight/day, about 0.01 toabout 300 mg/kg body weight/day, about 0.01 to about 100 mg/kg bodyweight/day.

When “combination therapy” is employed, an effective amount can beachieved using a first amount of a compound of Formula I or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a second amount of anadditional suitable therapeutic agent.

In one embodiment of this invention, a compound of Formula I, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and the additional therapeuticagent are each administered in an effective amount (i.e., each in anamount which would be therapeutically effective if administered alone).In another embodiment, the compound of Formula I and the additionaltherapeutic agent are each administered in an amount which alone doesnot provide a therapeutic effect (a sub-therapeutic dose). In yetanother embodiment, the compound of Formula I can be administered in aneffective amount, while the additional therapeutic agent is administeredin a sub-therapeutic dose. In still another embodiment, the compound ofFormula I can be administered in a sub-therapeutic dose, while theadditional therapeutic agent, for example, a suitable cancer-therapeuticagent is administered in an effective amount.

As used herein, the terms “in combination” or “co-administration” can beused interchangeably to refer to the use of more than one therapy (e.g.,one or more prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents). The use of theterms does not restrict the order in which therapies (e.g., prophylacticand/or therapeutic agents) are administered to a subject.

Co-administration encompasses administration of the first and secondamounts of the compounds in an essentially simultaneous manner, such asin a single pharmaceutical composition, for example, capsule or tablethaving a fixed ratio of first and second amounts, or in multiple,separate capsules or tablets for each. In addition, suchco-administration also encompasses use of each compound in a sequentialmanner in either order. When co-administration involves the separateadministration of the first amount of a compound of Formula I and asecond amount of an additional therapeutic agent, the compounds areadministered sufficiently close in time to have the desired therapeuticeffect. For example, the period of time between each administrationwhich can result in the desired therapeutic effect, can range fromminutes to hours and can be determined taking into account theproperties of each compound such as potency, solubility,bioavailability, plasma half-life and kinetic profile. For example, acompound of Formula I and the second therapeutic agent can beadministered in any order within about 24 hours of each other, withinabout 16 hours of each other, within about 8 hours of each other, withinabout 4 hours of each other, within about 1 hour of each other or withinabout 30 minutes of each other.

More, specifically, a first therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeuticagent such as a compound described herein) can be administered prior to(e.g., 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeksbefore), concomitantly with, or subsequent to (e.g., 5 minutes, 15minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks,4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks after) theadministration of a second therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeuticagent such as an anti-cancer agent) to a subject.

Examples of other therapeutic agents that may be combined with acompound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,either administered separately or in the same pharmaceutical compositioninclude, but are not limited to:

(1) Endothelium-derived releasing factor (EDRF) or NO gas.

(2) NO donors such as a nitrosothiol, a nitrite, a sydnonimine, aNONOate, a N-nitrosamine, a N-hydroxyl nitrosamine, a nitrosimine,nitrotyrosine, a diazetine dioxide, an oxatriazole 5-imine, an oxime, ahydroxylamine, a N-hydroxyguanidine, a hydroxyurea or a furoxan. Someexamples of these types of compounds include: glyceryl trinitrate (alsoknown as GTN, nitroglycerin, nitroglycerine, and trinitrogylcerin), thenitrate ester of glycerol; sodium nitroprusside (SNP), wherein amolecule of nitric oxide is coordinated to iron metal forming a squarebipyramidal complex; 3-morpholinosydnonimine (SIN-1), a zwitterioniccompound formed by combination of a morpholine and a sydnonimine;S-nitroso-N-acetylpenicillamine (SNAP), an N-acetylated amino acidderivative with a nitrosothiol functional group; diethylenetriamine/NO(DETA/NO), a compound of nitric oxide covalently linked todiethylenetriamine; an m-nitroxymethyl phenyl ester of acetyl salicylicacid. More specific examples of some of these classes of NO donorsinclude: the classic nitrovasodilators, such as organic nitrate andnitrite esters, including nitroglycerin, amyl nitrite, isosorbidedinitrate, isosorbide 5-mononitrate, and nicorandil; isosorbide(Dilatrate®-SR, Imdur®, Ismo®, Isordil®, Isordil®, Titradose®,Monoket®), 3-morpholinosydnonimine; linsidomine chlorohydrate (“SIN-1”);S-nitroso-N-acetylpenicillamine (“SNAP”); S-nitrosoglutathione (GSNO),sodium nitroprusside, S-nitrosoglutathione mono-ethyl-ester(GSNO-ester),6-(2-hydroxy-1-methyl-nitrosohydrazino)-N-methyl-1-hexanamine ordiethylamine NONOate.(3) Other substances that enhance cGMP concentrations such asprotoporphyrin IX, arachidonic acid and phenyl hydrazine derivatives.(4) Nitric Oxide Synthase substrates: for example, N-hydroxyguanidinebased analogs, such as N[G]-hydroxy-L-arginine (NOHA), 1-(3,4-dimethoxy-2-chlorobenzylideneamino)-3-hydroxyguanidine, and PR5 (1-(3,4-dimethoxy-2-chlorobenzylideneamino)-3-hydroxyguanidine); L-argininederivatives (such as homo-Arg, homo-NOHA, N-tert-butyloxy- andN-(3-methyl-2-butenyl)oxy-L-arginine, canavanine, epsilonguanidine-carpoic acid, agmatine, hydroxyl-agmatine, andL-tyrosyl-L-arginine); N-alkyl-N′-hydroxyguanidines (such asN-cyclopropyl-N′-hydroxyguanidine and N-butyl-N′-hydroxyguanidine),N-aryl-N′-hydroxyguanidines (such as N-phenyl-N′-hydroxyguanidine andits para-substituted derivatives which bear —F, —Cl, -methyl, —OHsubstituents, respectively); guanidine derivatives such as3-(trifluoromethyl) propylguanidine.(5) Compounds which enhance eNOS transcription.(6) NO independent heme-independent sGC activators, including, but notlimited to: BAY 58-2667 (described in patent publication DE19943635)

HMR-1766 (ataciguat sodium, described in patent publicationWO2000002851)

S 3448(2-(4-chloro-phenylsulfonylamino)-4,5-dimethoxy-N-(4-(thiomorpholine-4-sulfonyl)-phenyl)-benzamide(described in patent publications DE19830430 and WO2000002851)

andHMR-1069 (Sanofi-Aventis).(7) Heme-dependent, NO-independent sGC stimulators including, but notlimited to:YC-1 (see patent publications EP667345 and DE19744026)

riociguat (BAY 63-2521, Adempas®, described in DE19834044)

neliciguat (BAY 60-4552, described in WO 2003095451)

vericiguat (BAY 1021189)

BAY 41-2272 (described in DE19834047 and DE19942809)

BAY 41-8543 (described in DE19834044)

etriciguat (described in WO 2003086407)

CFM-1571 (described in patent publication WO2000027394)

A-344905, its acrylamide analogue A-350619 and the aminopyrimidineanalogue A-778935

and other sGC stimulators described in one of publicationsUS20090209556, U.S. Pat. No. 8,455,638, US20110118282 (WO2009032249),US20100292192, US20110201621, U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,947,664, 8,053,455(WO2009094242), US20100216764, U.S. Pat. No. 8,507,512, (WO2010099054)US20110218202 (WO2010065275), US20130012511 (WO2011119518),US20130072492 (WO2011149921), US20130210798 (WO2012058132) and othercompounds described in Tetrahedron Letters (2003), 44(48): 8661-8663.(8) Compounds that inhibit the degradation of cGMP, such as: PDE5inhibitors, such as, for example, sildenafil (Viagra®) and relatedagents such as avanafil, lodenafil, mirodenafil, sildenafil citrate(Revatio®), tadalafil (Cialis® or Adcirca®), vardenafil (Levitra®) andudenafil; alprostadil; dipyridamole and PF-00489791; and PDE9inhibitors, such as, for example, PF-04447943, and PDE10 inhibitors suchas, for example, PF-02545920 (PF-10).(9) Calcium channel blockers of the following types: dihydropyridinecalcium channel blockers such asamlodipine (Norvasc®), aranidipine(Sapresta®), azelnidipine (Calblock®), barnidipine (HypoCa®), benidipine(Coniel®), cilnidipine (Atelec®, Cinalong®, Siscard®), clevidipine(Cleviprex®), diltiazem, efonidipine (Landel®), felodipine (Plendil®),lacidipine (Motens®, Lacipil®), lercanidipine (Zanidip®), manidipine(Calslot®, Madipine®), nicardipine (Cardene®, Carden SR®), nifedipine(Procardia®, Adalat®), nilvadipine (Nivadil®), nimodipine (Nimotop®),nisoldipine (Baymycard®, Sular®, Syscor®), nitrendipine (Cardif®,Nitrepin®, Baylotensin®), pranidipine (Acalas®), isradipine (Lomir®);phenylalkylamine calcium channel blockers such as verapamil (Calan®,Isoptin®)

and gallopamil (Procorum®, D600);benzothiazepines such asdiltiazem (Cardizem®)

andnonselective calcium channel inhibitors such as mibefradil, bepridil,fluspirilene, and fendiline.(10) Endothelin receptor antagonists (ERAs) such as the dual (ET_(A) andET_(B)) endothelin receptor antagonist bosentan (Tracleer®), sitaxentan(Thelin®) or ambrisentan (Letairis®).(11) Prostacyclin derivatives or analogues, such asprostacyclin(prostaglandin I₂), epoprostenol (synthetic prostacyclin, Flolan®),treprostinil (Remodulin®), iloprost (Ilomedin®), iloprost (Ventavis®);and oral and inhaled forms of Remodulin® under development.(12) Antihyperlipidemics such as the following types:bile acid sequestrants like cholestyramine, colestipol, colestilan,colesevelam or sevelamer;statins like atorvastatin, simvastatin, lovastatin, fluvastatin,pitavastatin, rosuvastatin and pravastatin;cholesterol absorption inhibitors such as ezetimibe;other lipid lowering agents such as icosapent ethyl ester, omega-3-acidethyl esters, reducol;fibric acid derivatives such as clofibrate, bezafibrate, clinofibrate,gemfibrozil, ronifibrate, binifibrate, fenofibrate, ciprofibrate,choline fenofibrate;nicotinic acid derivatives such as acipimox and niacin;combinations of statins, niacin and intestinal cholesterolabsorption-inhibiting supplements (ezetimibe and others) and fibrates;andantiplatelet therapies such as clopidogrel bisulfate.(13) Anticoagulants, such as the following types:coumarines (Vitamin K antagonists) such as warfarin (Coumadin®),cenocoumarol, phenprocoumon and phenindione;heparin and derivatives such as low molecular weight heparin,fondaparinux and idraparinux; direct thrombin inhibitors such asargatroban, lepirudin, bivalirudin, dabigatran and ximelagatran(Exanta®); andtissue-plasminogen activators, used to dissolve clots and unblockarteries, such as alteplase.(14) Antiplatelet drugs such as, for instance, topidogrel, ticlopidine,dipyridamole and aspirin.(15) ACE inhibitors, for example the following types:sulfhydryl-containing agents such as captopril (Capoten®) andzofenopril;dicarboxylate-containing agents such as enalapril (Vasotec/Renitec®),ramipril (Altace®/Tritace®/Ramace®/Ramiwin®), quinapril (Accupril®),perindopril (Coversyl®/Aceon®), lisinopril(Lisodur®/Lopril®/Novatec®/Prinivil®/Zestril®) and benazepril(Lotensin®);phosphonate-containing agents such as fosinopril;naturally occurring ACE inhibitors such as casokinins and lactokinins,which are breakdown products of casein and whey that occur naturallyafter ingestion of milk products, especially cultured milk;the lactotripeptides Val-Pro-Pro and Ile-Pro-Pro produced by theprobiotic Lactobacillus helveticus or derived from casein also havingACE-inhibiting and antihypertensive functions; other ACE inhibitors suchas alacepril, delapril, cilazapril, imidapril, trandolapril, temocapril,moexipril and pirapril.(16) Supplemental oxygen therapy.(17) Beta blockers, such as the following types: non-selective agentssuch as alprenolol, bucindolol, carteolol, carvedilol, labetalol,nadolol, penbutolol, pindolol, oxprenonol, acebutolol, sotalol,mepindolol, celiprolol, arotinolol, tertatolol, amosulalol, nipradilol,propranolol and timolol;β₁-Selective agents such as cebutolol, atenolol, betaxolol, bisoprolol,celiprolol, dobutamine hydrochloride, irsogladine maleate, carvedilol,talinolol, esmolol, metoprolol and nebivolol; andβ₂-Selective agents such as butaxamine.(18) Antiarrhythmic agents such as the following types:Type I (sodium channel blockers) such as quinidine, lidocaine,phenytoin, propafenone;Type III (potassium channel blockers) such as amiodarone, dofetilide andsotalol; andType V such as adenosine and digoxin.(19) Diuretics such as thiazide diuretics, for example chlorothiazide,chlorthalidone and hydrochlorothiazide, bendroflumethiazide,cyclopenthiazide, methyclothiazide, polythiazide, quinethazone,xipamide, metolazone, indapamide, cicletanine; loop diuretics, such asfurosemide and toresamide; potassium-sparing diuretics such asamiloride, spironolactone, canrenoate potassium, eplerenone andtriamterene; combinations of these agents; other diuretics such asacetazolamid and carperitide.(20) Direct-acting vasodilators such as hydralazine hydrochloride,diazoxide, sodium nitroprusside, cadralazine; other vasodilators such asisosorbide dinitrate and isosorbide 5-mononitrate.(21) Exogenous vasodilators such as Adenocard® and alpha blockers.(22) Alpha-1-adrenoceptor antagonists such as prazosin, indoramin,urapidil, bunazosin, terazosin and doxazosin; atrial natriuretic peptide(ANP), ethanol, histamine-inducers, tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) andpapaverine.(23) Bronchodilators of the following types:short acting β₂ agonists, such as albutamol or albuterol (Ventolin®) andterbutaline;long acting β₂ agonists (LABAs) such as salmeterol and formoterol;anticholinergics such as pratropium and tiotropium; andtheophylline, a bronchodilator and phosphodiesterase inhibitor.(24) Corticosteroids such as beclomethasone, methylprednisolone,betamethasone, prednisone, prednisolone, triamcinolone, dexamethasone,fluticasone, flunisolide, hydrocortisone, and corticosteroid analogssuch as budesonide.(25) Dietary supplements such as, for example omega-3 oils; folic acid,niacin, zinc, copper, Korean red ginseng root, ginkgo, pine bark,Tribulus terrestris, arginine, Avena sativa, horny goat weed, maca root,muira puama, saw palmetto, and Swedish flower pollen; vitamin C, VitaminE, Vitamin K2; testosterone supplements, testosterone transdermal patch;zoraxel, naltrexone, bremelanotide and melanotan II.(26) PGD2 receptor antagonists.(27) Immunosuppressants such as cyclosporine (cyclosporine A,Sandimmune®, Neoral®), tacrolimus (FK-506, Prograf®), rapamycin(Sirolimus®, Rapamune®) and other FK-506 type immunosuppressants,mycophenolate, e.g., mycophenolate mofetil (CellCept®).(28) Non-steroidal anti-asthmatics such as β2-agonists like terbutaline,metaproterenol, fenoterol, isoetharine, albuterol, salmeterol,bitolterol and pirbuterol; β2-agonist-corticosteroid combinations suchas salmeterol-fluticasone (Advair®), formoterol-budesonide (Symbicort®),theophylline, cromolyn, cromolyn sodium, nedocromil, atropine,ipratropium, ipratropium bromide and leukotriene biosynthesis inhibitors(zileuton, BAY1005).(29) Non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents (NSAIDs) such as propionicacid derivatives like alminoprofen, benoxaprofen, bucloxic acid,carprofen, fenbufen, fenoprofen, fluprofen, flurbiprofen, ibuprofen,indoprofen, ketoprofen, miroprofen, naproxen, oxaprozin, pirprofen,pranoprofen, suprofen, tiaprofenic acid and tioxaprofen); acetic acidderivatives such as indomethacin, acemetacin, alclofenac, clidanac,diclofenac, fenclofenac, fenclozic acid, fentiazac, furofenac, ibufenac,isoxepac, oxpinac, sulindac, tiopinac, tolmetin, zidometacin andzomepirac; fenamic acid derivatives such as flufenamic acid,meclofenamic acid, mefenamic acid, niflumic acid and tolfenamic acid;biphenylcarboxylic acid derivatives such as diflunisal and flufenisal;oxicams such as isoxicam, piroxicam, sudoxicam and tenoxican;salicylates such as acetyl salicylic acid and sulfasalazine; and thepyrazolones such as apazone, bezpiperylon, feprazone, mofebutazone,oxyphenbutazone and phenylbutazone.(30) Cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) inhibitors such as celecoxib (Celebrex®),rofecoxib (Vioxx®), valdecoxib, etoricoxib, parecoxib and lumiracoxib;opioid analgesics such as codeine, fentanyl, hydromorphone, levorphanol,meperidine, methadone, morphine, oxycodone, oxymorphone, propoxyphene,buprenorphine, butorphanol, dezocine, nalbuphine and pentazocine.(31) Anti-diabetic agents such as insulin and insulin mimetics;sulfonylureas such as glyburide, glybenclamide, glipizide, gliclazide,gliquidone, glimepiride, meglinatide, tolbutamide, chlorpropamide,acetohexamide and olazamide; biguanides such as metformin (Glucophage®);α-glucosidase inhibitors such as acarbose, epalrestat, voglibose,miglitol; thiazolidinone compounds such as rosiglitazone (Avandia®),troglitazone (Rezulin®), ciglitazone, pioglitazone (Actos®) andenglitazone; insulin sensitizers such as pioglitazone and rosiglitazone;insulin secretagogues such as repaglinide, nateglinide and mitiglinide;incretin mimetics such as exanatide and liraglutide; amylin analoguessuch as pramlintide; glucose lowering agents such as chromiumpicolinate, optionally combined with biotin; dipeptidyl peptidase IVinhibitors such as sitagliptin, vildagliptin, saxagliptin, alogliptinand linagliptin.(32) HDL cholesterol-increasing agents such as anacetrapib anddalcetrapib.(33) Antiobesity drugs such as methamphetamine hydrochloride,amfepramone hydrochloride (Tenuate®), phentermine (Ionamin®),benzfetamine hydrochloride (Didrex®), phendimetrazine tartrate(Bontril®, Prelu-2 ®, Plegine®), mazindol (Sanorex®), orlistat(Xenical®), sibutramine hydrochloride monohydrate (Meridia®, Reductil®),rimonabant (Acomplia®), amfepramone, chromium picolinate; combinationsuch as phentermine/topiramate, bupropion/naltrexone,sibutramine/metformin, bupropion SR/zonisamide SR, salmeterol,xinafoate/fluticasone propionate; lorcaserin hydrochloride,phentermine/topiramate, cetilistat, exenatide, liraglutide, metforminhydrochloride, sibutramine/metformin, bupropion SR/zonisamide SR,CORT-108297, canagliflozin, chromium picolinate, GSK-1521498, LY-377604,metreleptin, obinepitide, P-57AS3, PSN-821, salmeterolxinafoate/fluticasone propionate, sodium tungstate, somatropin(recombinant), tesamorelin, tesofensine, velneperit, zonisamide,beloranib hemioxalate, insulinotropin, resveratrol, sobetirome,tetrahydrocannabivarin and beta-lapachone.(34) Angiotensin receptor blockers such as losartan, valsartan,candesartan, cilexetil, eprosaran, irbesartan, telmisartan, olmesartran,medoxomil, azilsartan and medoxomil.(35) Renin inhibitors such as aliskiren hemifumirate.(36) Centrally acting alpha-2-adrenoceptor agonists such as methyldopa,clonidine and guanfacine.(37) Adrenergic neuron blockers such as guanethidine and guanadrel.(38) Imidazoline I-1 receptor agonists such as rimenidine dihydrogenphosphate and moxonidine hydrochloride hydrate.(39) Aldosterone antagonists such as spironolactone and eplerenone.(40) Potassium channel activators such as pinacidil.(41) Dopamine D1 agonists such as fenoldopam mesilate; other dopamineagonists such as ibopamine, dopexamine and docarpamine.(42) 5-HT2 antagonists such as ketanserin.(43) Vasopressin antagonists such as tolvaptan.(44) Calcium channel sensitizers such as levosimendan or activators suchas nicorandil.(45) PDE-3 inhibitors such as amrinone, milrinone, enoximone,vesnarinone, pimobendan, and olprinone.(46) Adenylate cyclase activators such as colforsin dapropatehydrochloride.(47) Positive inotropic agents such as digoxin and metildigoxin;metabolic cardiotonic agents such as ubidecarenone; brain natriureticpeptides such as nesiritide.(48) Drugs used for the treatment of erectile dysfunction such asalprostadil, aviptadil, and phentolamine mesilate.(49) Drugs used in the treatment of obesity, including but not limitedto, methamphetamine hydrochloride (Desoxyn®), amfepramone hydrochloride(Tenuate®), phentermine (Ionamin®), benzfetamine hydrochloride(Didrex®), phendimetrazine hydrochloride (Bontril®, Prelu-2®, Plegine®),mazindol (Sanorex®) and orlistat (Xenical®).(50) Drugs used for the treatment of Alzheimer's disease and dementiassuch as the following types:acetyl cholinesterase inhibitors including galantamine (Razadyne®),rivastigmine (Exelon®), donepezil (Aricept®) and tacrine (Cognex®);NMDA receptor antagonists such as mernantine (Namenda®); andoxidoreductase inhibitors such as idebenone.(51) Psychiatric medications such as the following types:ziprasidone (Geodon™), risperidone (Risperdal™), olanzapine (Zyprexa™),valproate;dopamine D4 receptor antagonists such as clozapine;dopamine D2 receptor antagonists such as nemonapride;mixed dopamine D1/D2 receptor antagonists such as zuclopenthixol;GABA A receptor modulators such as carbamazepine;sodium channel inhibitors such as lamotrigine;monoamine oxidase inhibitors such as moclobemide and indeloxazine;primavanserin, perospirone; andPDE4 inhibitors such as rolumilast.(52) Drugs used for the treatment of movement disorders or symptoms suchas the following types:catechol-O-methyl transferase inhibitors such as entacapone;monoamine oxidase B inhibitors such as selegiline;dopamine receptor modulators such as levodopa;dopamine D3 receptor agonists such as pramipexole;decarboxylase inhibitors such as carbidopa;other dopamine receptor agonists such as pergolide, ropinirole,cabergoline;ritigonide, istradefylline, talipexole; zonisamide and safinamide; andsynaptic vesicular amine transporter inhibitors such as tetrabenazine.(53) Drugs used for the treatment of mood or affective disorders or OCDsuch as the following typestricyclic antidepressants such as amitriptyline (Elavil®), desipramine(Norpramin®), imipramine (Tofranil®), amoxapine (Asendin®),nortriptyline and clomipramine;selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) such as paroxetine(Paxil®), fluoxetine (Prozac®), sertraline (Zoloft®), and citralopram(Celexa®);doxepin (Sinequan®), trazodone (Desyrel®) and agomelatine;selective norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors (SNRIs) such asvenlafaxine, reboxetine and atomoxetine; dopaminergic antidepressantssuch as bupropion and amineptine.(54) Drugs for the enhancement of synaptic plasticity such as thefollowing types:nicotinic receptor antagonists such as mecamylamine; andmixed 5-HT, dopamine and norepinephrine receptor agonists such aslurasidone.(55) Drugs used for the treatment of ADHD such as amphetamine; 5-HTreceptor modulators such as vortioxetine and alpha-2 adrenoceptoragonists such as clonidine.(56) Neutral endopeptidase (NEP) inhibitors such as sacubitril,omapatrilat; and(57) Methylene blue (MB).Kits

The compounds and pharmaceutical formulations described herein may becontained in a kit. The kit may include single or multiple doses of twoor more agents, each packaged or formulated individually, or single ormultiple doses of two or more agents packaged or formulated incombination. Thus, one or more agents can be present in first container,and the kit can optionally include one or more agents in a secondcontainer. The container or containers are placed within a package, andthe package can optionally include administration or dosageinstructions. A kit can include additional components such as syringesor other means for administering the agents as well as diluents or othermeans for formulation. Thus, the kits can comprise: a) a pharmaceuticalcomposition comprising a compound described herein and apharmaceutically acceptable carrier, vehicle or diluent; and b) acontainer or packaging. The kits may optionally comprise instructionsdescribing a method of using the pharmaceutical compositions in one ormore of the methods described herein (e.g. preventing or treating one ormore of the diseases and disorders described herein). The kit mayoptionally comprise a second pharmaceutical composition comprising oneor more additional agents described herein for co therapy use, apharmaceutically acceptable carrier, vehicle or diluent. Thepharmaceutical composition comprising the compound described herein andthe second pharmaceutical composition contained in the kit may beoptionally combined in the same pharmaceutical composition.

A kit includes a container or packaging for containing thepharmaceutical compositions and may also include divided containers suchas a divided bottle or a divided foil packet. The container can be, forexample a paper or cardboard box, a glass or plastic bottle or jar, are-sealable bag (for example, to hold a “refill” of tablets forplacement into a different container), or a blister pack with individualdoses for pressing out of the pack according to a therapeutic schedule.It is feasible that more than one container can be used together in asingle package to market a single dosage form. For example, tablets maybe contained in a bottle which is in turn contained within a box.

An example of a kit is a so-called blister pack. Blister packs are wellknown in the packaging industry and are being widely used for thepackaging of pharmaceutical unit dosage forms (tablets, capsules, andthe like). Blister packs generally consist of a sheet of relativelystiff material covered with a foil of a preferably transparent plasticmaterial. During the packaging process, recesses are formed in theplastic foil. The recesses have the size and shape of individual tabletsor capsules to be packed or may have the size and shape to accommodatemultiple tablets and/or capsules to be packed. Next, the tablets orcapsules are placed in the recesses accordingly and the sheet ofrelatively stiff material is sealed against the plastic foil at the faceof the foil which is opposite from the direction in which the recesseswere formed. As a result, the tablets or capsules are individuallysealed or collectively sealed, as desired, in the recesses between theplastic foil and the sheet. Preferably the strength of the sheet is suchthat the tablets or capsules can be removed from the blister pack bymanually applying pressure on the recesses whereby an opening is formedin the sheet at the place of the recess. The tablet or capsule can thenbe removed via said opening.

It may be desirable to provide written memory aid containing informationand/or instructions for the physician, pharmacist or subject regardingwhen the medication is to be taken. A “daily dose” can be a singletablet or capsule or several tablets or capsules to be taken on a givenday. When the kit contains separate compositions, a daily dose of one ormore compositions of the kit can consist of one tablet or capsule whilea daily dose of another or more compositions of the kit can consist ofseveral tablets or capsules. A kit can take the form of a dispenserdesigned to dispense the daily doses one at a time in the order of theirintended use. The dispenser can be equipped with a memory-aid, so as tofurther facilitate compliance with the regimen. An example of such amemory-aid is a mechanical counter which indicates the number of dailydoses that have been dispensed. Another example of such a memory-aid isa battery-powered micro-chip memory coupled with a liquid crystalreadout, or audible reminder signal which, for example, reads out thedate that the last daily dose has been taken and/or reminds one when thenext dose is to be taken.

EXAMPLES

All references provided in the Examples are herein incorporated byreference. As used herein, all abbreviations, symbols and conventionsare consistent with those used in the contemporary scientificliterature. See, e.g. Janet S. Dodd, ed., The ACS Style Guide: A Manualfor Authors and Editors, 2^(nd) Ed., Washington, D.C.: American ChemicalSociety, 1997, herein incorporated in its entirety by reference.

Example 1: Compound Syntheses

Intermediate 1a

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile (1a)

The title compound was synthesized in 2 steps according to a patentliterature procedure (WO2015/187470A1) as a yellow solid (0.60 g, 39%yield over 2 steps). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.09 (s, 1H),8.14 (s, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 7.35 (t, 1H), 7.28 (m, 1H), 7.10 (m, 2H),4.60 (s, 2H).

Using a similar procedure for the synthesis of 1a, the following nitrileintermediates were prepared. The reaction conditions (such as reagentsratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

-   8-Phenylimidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile;-   8-Benzylimidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile;-   8-(4-Fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile;-   8-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile;-   8-(2,5-Difluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile;-   8-(3,3,4,4,4-Pentafluorobutyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile,-   8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-2-methylimidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile;-   8-(3,5-Difluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile;-   8-(3,5-Difluoro-4-methylbenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile.

Alternatively, Intermediate 1a and related analogs (Such as Intermediate1b) can be synthesized by the following procedure:

Step 1: Synthesis of 6-bromo-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine

A suspension of dry zinc powder (47 g, 720 mmol, dried by heating invacuo) in THF (750 mL) was treated with 1,2-dibromoethane (1 mL) and theresultant mixture was heated to 50° C. Chlorotrimethylsilane (1 mL) wasthen added. After stirring at 48-50° C. for 30 min, the mixture wascooled to ambient temperature. Dry lithium chloride (30 g, 710 mmol,dried by heating in vacuo) was added, followed by dropwise addition of asolution of 2-fluorobenzyl bromide (74 g, 390 mmol) in THF (100 mL)(note: exothermic, reaction temperature was maintained below 48° C.).The mixture was stirred for 1 hour at ambient temperature. A slurry of6,8-dibromoimidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine (99 g, 360 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₂Cl₂ (7.8g, 11 mmol) in THF (500 mL) was degassed by bubbling with nitrogen for10 min and added quickly to the 2-fluorobenzylzinc bromide reagent withthe aid of THF (100 mL). The reaction vessel was purged with nitrogenand the mixture was stirred overnight at ambient temperature untilcomplete consumption of starting material. The reaction was quenchedwith saturated NH₄Cl solution (800 mL). The brown organic phase wasconcentrated to dryness, re-dissolved in DCM (1.3 L) and filteredthrough a bed of Celite. The organic layer in the filtrate wascollected, decolorized with activated charcoal (45 g), filtered throughCelite and concentrated to dryness. The crude material was driedazeotropically with toluene (2×500 mL) and carried forward withoutpurification.

Step 2: Synthesis of8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile

A reaction mixture comprised of the crude material (360 mmol,theoretical yield) from the previous step, zinc cyanide (35 g, 300mmol), Pd₂(dba)₃ (16 g, 18 mmol), 1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene(dppf) (14 g, 25 mmol), and zinc powder (1.0 g) in DMF (800 mL) wasdegassed under nitrogen for 10 minutes and then heated at 85° C. untilcomplete consumption of starting material. The reaction was cooled toambient temperature and poured into EtOAc (1.5 L), 10% NH₄Cl solution(1.1 L) and 5% NaCl solution (1.0 L). The organic layer was filteredthrough a bed of Celite and washed with EtOAc (2×750 mL). The organicfiltrate was washed with 10% NaCl solution (2×1.0 L), decolorized withactivated charcoal (75 g), filtered through Celite and washed with EtOAc(2×300 mL). The filtrate was concentrated to dryness and suspended in amixture of DCM (150 mL) and MTBE (300 mL). After stirring for 1 hour,the product was collected by filtration, washed with MTBE (2×100 mL) anddried in a vacuum oven at 45° C. The title compound was obtained as abrown solid (52 g, 57% yield).

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.09 (s, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1H), 7.91(s, 1H), 7.35 (app. t, 1H), 7.27 (m, 2H), 7.13-7.06 (m, 2H), 4.60 (s,2H).

Intermediate 1b

8-(3-Fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile (1b)

The title compound was synthesized in 2 steps.

Step 1: Synthesis of 6-bromo-8-(3-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine

A suspension of dry zinc powder (2.6 g, 40 mmol) in THF (50 mL) wastreated with 1,2-dibromoethane (0.30 mL, 3.5 mmol) and the resultantmixture was heated at 50° C. for 5 minutes. Chlorotrimethylsilane (0.30mL, 2.4 mmol) was then added and the mixture was cooled to ambienttemperature. Dry lithium chloride (1.7 g, 40 mmol) was added, followedby dropwise addition of a solution of 3-fluorobenzyl bromide (4.8 g, 26mmol) in THF (25 mL) (note: exothermic, reaction temperature wasmaintained below 35° C.). The mixture was stirred for 1 hour at ambienttemperature, followed by addition of a slurry of6,8-dibromoimidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine (5.9 g, 21 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₂Cl₂(0.25 g, 0.36 mmol) in THF (75 mL). The reaction mixture was degassedwith nitrogen and stirred overnight at ambient temperature untilcomplete consumption of starting material. The reaction mixture wasconcentrated and diluted with DCM (100 mL) and 10% NH₄Cl solution (100mL). The thick mixture was filtered through a bed of Celite, and theorganic layer in the filtrate was collected. The organic layer was driedand decolorized with Na₂SO₄ (10 g) and activated charcoal (7 g),filtered through Celite and concentrated to yield a crude orange oil(7.1 g) which was carried forward without purification.

Step 2: Synthesis of8-(3-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile

A reaction mixture comprised of the crude material (21 mmol, theoreticalyield) from the previous step, zinc cyanide (3.0 g, 26 mmol), Pd₂(dba)₃(1.9 g, 2.1 mmol), 1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene (dppf) (1.5 g,2.7 mmol), and zinc powder (0.30 g, 4.6 mmol) in DMF (70 mL) wasdegassed under nitrogen for 5 minutes and then heated at 110° C. untilcomplete consumption of starting material. The reaction was cooled toambient temperature, diluted with EtOAc (150 mL) and filtered through abed of celite. The organic filtrate was washed with 10% NH₄Cl solution(2×100 mL), dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated to afford abrown oil which was purified by column chromatography (15 to 40%EtOAc/hexanes gradient) to afford the title compound as an off-whitesolid (2.4 g, 45% yield).

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 9.37 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 7.98 (s,1H), 7.29-7.39 (m, 1H), 7.23 (d, 2H), 6.99-7.12 (m, 1H), 4.45-4.56 (m,2H).

Using a similar procedure for the synthesis of Intermediates 1a and 1b,the following nitrile intermediates were prepared. The reactionconditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) weremodified as needed.

-   8-(2,6-Difluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile;-   8-(3-Fluoro-4-methylbenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile.    Intermediate 2

8-Benzyl-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile (2)

The title compound was synthesized in 2 steps according to a patentliterature procedure (WO2016/081668A1) as a gold residue (0.12 g, 23%yield over 2 steps).

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 9.96 (s, 1H), 8.94 (s, 1H), 7.39 (d,2H) 7.30 (dd, 2H), 7.23 (t, 1H), 4.53 (s, 2H).

Using a similar procedure for the synthesis of 2, the following nitrileintermediate was prepared. The reaction conditions (such as reagentsratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

-   8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile.-   8-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile;-   8-(3-Fluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile;-   8-(2,5-Difluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile;-   8-(3,5-Difluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile.    Compound I-1

General Procedure A:8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-1)

To a solution of 8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile(1a) (4.0 g, 16 mmol) in methanol (40 mL) was added anhydrous hydrazine(3.1 mL, 100 mmol). After stirring at ambient temperature overnight,complete disappearance of starting material was observed. The reactionwas concentrated in vacuo, residual hydrazine was removed with methanoland toluene chasing, and the resultant foam was dried under vacuumovernight. The brown foam was taken up in DCM (75 mL) and2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride (3.8 ml, 27 mmol) was added dropwise toprevent a strong exothermic reaction. The reaction was stirred atambient temperature until complete consumption of the amidrazoneintermediate. The solvent was removed in vacuo and dried to a yellowresidue. The residue was taken up in AcOH (10 mL) and EtOH (100 mL) andheated at 90° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was cooled to ambienttemperature and concentrated to half the reaction volume. The resultantthick suspension was filtered, and the filtrate was concentrated tobrown oil. The crude material was purified using silica gelchromatography (10-100% EtOAc/hexanes gradient) to isolate the titlecompound (4.0 g, 69% yield) as a tan solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.46 (s, 1H), 9.45 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s,1H), 7.87 (s, 1H), 7.43 (t, 1H), 7.22-7.32 (m, 1H), 7.14-7.22 (m, 1H),7.09 (t, 1H), 4.60 (s, 2H). LCMS [M+H]=363.1

Compound I-2

8-(3-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-2) was synthesized according to General Procedure A as an off-whitesolid (170 mg, 60% yield). The reaction conditions (such as reagentsratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.22 (s, 1H), 8.17 (s, 1H), 7.87(s, 1H), 7.35-7.24 (m, 3H), 6.92 (app. t, 1H), 4.61 (s, 2H). LCMS[M+H]=363.2

Compound I-3

6-(3-(Difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-8-(3-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-3) was synthesized according to General Procedure A, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as an off-white solid (160 mg, 55% yield). The reactionconditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) weremodified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.17 (s, 1H), 8.17 (s, 1H), 7.86(s, 1H), 7.35-7.25 (m, 3H), 6.92 (m, 1H), 6.90 (t, 1H), 4.61 (s, 2H).LCMS [M+H]=345.2

Compound I-17

8-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine(I-17) was synthesized according to General Procedure A, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (120 mg, 62% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.3 (s, 1H), 9.58 (s, 1H), 8.83 (s,1H), 7.27-7.35 (m, 2H), 7.08-7.19 (m, 2H), 4.69 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=364.2

Compound I-19

8-(2,6-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-19) was synthesized according to General Procedure A as an off-whitesolid (300 mg, 87% yield). The reaction conditions (such as reagentsratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.3 (s, 1H), 9.43 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s,1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.37 (m, 1H), 7.08 (app. t, 2H), 4.63 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=381.2

Compound I-20

8-(2,6-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-20) was synthesized according to General Procedure A, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as an off-white solid (240 mg, 72% yield). The reactionconditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) weremodified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 14.9 (s, 1H), 9.38 (s, 1H), 8.24 (s,1H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 7.37 (m, 1H), 7.13 (t, 1H), 7.08 (app. t, 2H), 4.62(s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=363.2

Compound I-21

6-(3-(Difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-8-(3-fluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine(I-21) was synthesized according to General Procedure A, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (110 mg, 29% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.3 (s, 1H), 9.55 (s, 1H), 8.83 (s,1H), 7.30-7.37 (m, 3H), 7.19 (t, 1H), 7.04-7.09 (m, 1H), 4.61 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=346.2

Compound I-22

8-(3-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine(I-22) was synthesized according to General Procedure A as an off-whitesolid (140 mg, 49% yield). The reaction conditions (such as reagentsratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.7 (s, 1H), 9.62 (s, 1H), 8.85 (s,1H), 7.32-7.36 (m, 3H), 7.05-7.08 (m, 1H), 4.62 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=364.2

Compound I-23

8-(2,5-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine(I-23) was synthesized according to General Procedure A, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as an off-white solid (120 mg, 72% yield). The reactionconditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) weremodified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.49 (s, 1H), 8.65 (s, 1H), 7.25(m, 1H), 7.11 (m, 1H), 7.01 (m, 1H), 6.91 (t, 1H), 4.71 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=364.2

Compound I-24

8-(3,5-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine(I-24) was synthesized according to General Procedure A as a white solid(120 mg, 42% yield). The reaction conditions (such as reagents ratio,temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.7 (s, 1H), 9.63 (s, 1H), 8.86 (s,1H), 7.23 (d, 2H), 7.11 (t, 1H), 4.63 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=382.2

Compound I-25

8-(3,5-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine(I-25) was synthesized according to General Procedure A, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (157 mg, 57% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.2 (s, 1H), 9.50 (s, 1H), 8.77 (s,1H), 7.16 (d, 2H), 7.14 (t, 1H), 7.03 (m, 1H), 4.55 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=364.1

Compound I-4

General Procedure B:8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-methyl-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine

To a solution of 8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile(1a) (110 mg, 0.45 mmol) in methanol (2.0 mL) was added anhydroushydrazine (0.08 mL, 2.7 mmol). After stirring at ambient temperature for40 hours, complete disappearance of starting material was observed. Thereaction was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was dried undervacuum overnight. The residue was taken up in DCM (6.0 mL) and aceticanhydride (0.09 ml, 0.89 mmol) added dropwise to prevent a strongexothermic reaction. The reaction was stirred at ambient temperatureuntil complete consumption of the amidrazone intermediate. The solventwas removed in vacuo and dried to a yellow residue. The residue wastaken up in AcOH (0.2 mL) and EtOH (10 mL) and heated at 120° C. for 5hours in a microwave. The reaction mixture was cooled to ambienttemperature and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purifiedusing silica gel chromatography (10-30% acetonitrile/MeOH (7:1) in DCMgradient) to isolate the title compound (85 mg, 62% yield) as anoff-white solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.03 (s, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.81(s, 1H), 7.30 (app. t, 1H), 7.23 (m, 1H), 7.10-7.02 (m, 2H), 4.66 (s,2H), 2.48 (s, 3H). LCMS [M+H]=309.2

Compound I-5

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(perfluoroethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(Compound I-5) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, withthe exception that 2,2,3,3,3-pentafluoropropanoic anhydride was used asthe acylating agent, as a solid (1.5 mg, 1.5% yield). The reactionconditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) weremodified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.26 (s, 1H), 8.18 (s, 1H), 7.85(s, 1H), 7.34 (t, 1H), 7.24 (s, 1H), 7.09 (m, 2H), 4.69 (s, 2H). LCMS[M+H]=413.2

Compound I-6

8-Benzyl-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-6) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (57 mg, 52% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.09 (s, 1H), 8.05 (s, 1H), 7.75(s, 1H), 7.41 (d, 2H), 7.15 (t, 2H), 7.04-7.10 (m, 1H), 4.50 (s, 2H).LCMS [M+H]=345.2

Compound I-7

8-Benzyl-6-(3-(difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-7) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (15 mg, 16% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.06 (s, 1H), 7.75(s, 1H), 7.41 (d, 2H), 7.13-7.18 (m, 2H), 7.05-7.10 (m, 1H), 6.68-6.91(m, 1H), 4.50 (s, 2H). LCMS [M+H]=327.2

Compound I-8

8-(2,5-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-8) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (18 mg, 31% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.14 (s, 1H), 8.09 (s, 1H), 7.77(s, 1H), 7.07 (m, 1H), 7.00 (m, 1H), 6.86-6.92 (m, 1H), 4.57 (s, 2H).LCMS [M+H]=381.2

Compound I-9

8-(2,5-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-9) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as an off-white solid (32 mg, 36% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.10 (s, 1H), 8.09 (s, 1H), 7.76(s, 1H), 7.06 (m, 1H), 7.00 (m, 1H), 6.87-6.92 (m, 1H), 6.79 (t, 1H),4.56 (s, 2H). LCMS [M+H]=363.2

Compound I-10

8-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-10) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (110 mg, 39% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.25 (s, 1H), 8.19 (s, 1H), 7.86(s, 1H), 7.17-7.10 (m, 2H), 7.05 (m, 1H), 4.72 (s, 2H). LCMS [M+H]=381.2

Compound I-11

8-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-11) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as an off-white solid (55 mg, 25% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.21 (s, 1H), 8.19 (s, 1H), 7.86(s, 1H), 7.17-7.09 (m, 2H), 7.04 (m, 1H), 6.89 (t, 1H), 4.71 (s, 2H).LCMS [M+H]=363.2

Compound I-12

8-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-12) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as an off-white solid (75 mg, 84% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.50 (s, 1H), 9.41 (s, 1H), 8.24 (s,1H), 7.88 (s, 1H) 7.56 (dd, 2H), 7.10 (dd, 2H), 4.52 (s, 2H). LCMS[M+H]=363.2

Compound I-13

8-(3,3,4,4,4-Pentafluorobutyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-13) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a pale yellow solid (30 mg, 60% yield). The reactionconditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) weremodified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.24 (s, 1H), 8.19 (s, 1H), 7.86(s, 1H), 3.59-3.66 (m, 2H), 2.93-3.07 (m, 2H). LCMS [M+H]=401.2

Compound I-14

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-14) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as an off-white solid (46 mg, 56% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.28 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.00(s, 1H), 7.35 (t, 1H), 7.27 (d, 1H), 7.09 (m, 2H), 6.90 (m, 1H), 4.69(s, 2H). LCMS [M+H]=345.2

Compound I-15

8-Benzyl-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine(I-15) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (60 mg, 33% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.72 (s, 1H), 9.60 (s, 1H), 8.84 (s,1H), 7.50 (d, 2H) 7.30 (app. t, 2H), 7.21 (t, 1H), 4.59 (s, 2H). LCMS[M+H]=346.2

Compound I-16

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine(I-16) was synthesized according to General Procedure B as an off-whitesolid (1.2 mg, 1.0% yield). The reaction conditions (such as reagentsratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.51 (s, 1H), 8.65 (s, 1H), 7.43(app. t, 1H), 7.27 (m, 1H), 7.10 (t, 2H), 4.74 (s, 2H). LCMS [M+H]=364.1

Compound I-18

8-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine(I-18) was synthesized according to General Procedure B as a white solid(89 mg, 44% yield). The reaction conditions (such as reagents ratio,temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.7 (s, 1H), 9.64 (s, 1H), 8.84 (s,1H), 7.30-7.35 (m, 1H), 7.27-7.30 (m, 1H), 7.12-7.15 (m, 1H), 4.69 (s,2H).

LCMS [M+H]=382.2

Compound I-26

6-(3-(Difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine(I-26) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (180 mg, 88% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.3 (s, 1H), 9.57 (s, 1H), 8.81 (s,1H), 7.46 (app. t, 1H), 7.32-7.09 (m, 4H), 4.64 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=346.2

Compound I-27

8-(3-Fluoro-4-methylbenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-27) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a pale yellow solid (110 mg, 61% yield). The reactionconditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) weremodified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.5 (s, 1H), 9.41 (s, 1H), 8.24 (s,1H), 7.88 (s, 1H), 7.30 (d, 1H), 7.15-7.23 (m, 2H), 4.50 (s, 2H), 2.15(s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=377.1

Compound I-28

6-(3-(Difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-8-(3-fluoro-4-methylbenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-28) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a pale yellow solid (130 mg, 76% yield). The reactionconditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) weremodified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.1 (s, 1H), 9.36 (s, 1H), 8.24 (s,1H), 7.87 (s, 1H), 7.14-7.35 (m, 4H), 4.49 (s, 2H), 2.15 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=359.2

Compound I-29

8-(3,5-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-29) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a pale yellow solid (150 mg, 68% yield). The reactionconditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) weremodified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.5 (s, 1H), 9.43 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s,1H), 7.90 (s, 1H), 7.23 (d, 2H), 7.08 (t, 1H), 4.56 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=381.1

Compound I-30

8-(3,5-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-30) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a pale yellow solid (140 mg, 70% yield). The reactionconditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) weremodified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.1 (s, 1H), 9.38 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s,1H), 7.89 (s, 1H), 7.04-7.29 (m, 4H), 4.55 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=363.1

Compound I-31

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-2-methyl-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-31) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (35 mg, 55% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents, ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modifiedas needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) δ (ppm) 11.6 (br. s, 1H), 8.88 (s, 1H), 7.61 (s,1H), 7.39 (app. t, 1H), 7.26-7.32 (m, 1H), 7.09-7.15 (m, 2H), 4.69 (s,2H), 2.60 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=377.3

Compound I-32

6-(3-(Difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-2-methylimidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-32) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (44 mg, 85% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents, ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modifiedas needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) δ (ppm) 11.5 (br. s, 1H), 8.89 (s, 1H), 7.61 (s,1H), 7.38 (app. t, 1H), 7.26-7.34 (m, 1H), 7.08-7.14 (m, 2H), 6.77 (t,1H), 4.69 (s, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=359.2

Compound I-33

8-(2,5-Difluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine(I-33) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (72 mg, 41% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.51 (s, 1H), 8.66 (s, 1H),7.20-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.06-7.15 (m, 1H), 7.01 (m, 1H), 4.72 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=382.2

Compound I-34

8-(3,5-Difluoro-4-methylbenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-34) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (81 mg, 65% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) δ (ppm) 11.9 (br. s, 1H), 9.02 (s, 1H), 7.94 (s,1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 6.95 (d, 2H), 4.58 (s, 2H), 2.14 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=395.2

Compound I-35

8-(3,5-Difluoro-4-methylbenzyl)-6-(3-(difluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-35) was synthesized according to General Procedure B, with theexception that 2,2-difluoroacetic anhydride was used as the acylatingagent, as a white solid (83 mg, 62% yield). The reaction conditions(such as reagents ratio, temperature and reaction time) were modified asneeded.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) δ (ppm) 11.7 (br. s, 1H), 9.02 (s, 1H), 7.92 (s,1H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 6.98 (d, 2H), 6.81 (t, 1H), 4.58 (s, 2H), 2.15 (s,3H).

LCMS [M+H]=377.2

Compound I-36

4-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-1-methyl-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine(I-36)

The title compound was synthesized in 3 steps.

Step 1: Synthesis of6-chloro-4-(2-fluorobenzyl)-1-methyl-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine

To a mixture containing bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) dichloride(290 mg, 0.42 mmol), lithium chloride (350 mg, 8.3 mmol) and4,6-dichloro-1-methyl-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine (840 mg, 4.2 mmol) inTHF (2.0 mL) at ambient temperature was added (2-fluorobenzyl)zinc(II)chloride (0.5 M solution in THF, 10 mL, 5.0 mmol). The mixture wasstirred at ambient temperature for 24 hours. The mixture was taken up inEtOAc (100 mL) and water (100 mL). The organic layer was dried overNa₂SO₄, filtered and evaporated to give an oil. The crude material waspurified using silica gel chromatography (0-80% EtOAc/hexanes gradient)to give 6-chloro-4-(2-fluorobenzyl)-1-methyl-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine(1.0 g, 70% yield) as a yellow solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHZ, CDCl₃) δ (ppm) 7.87 (s, 1H), 7.63-7.79 (m, 1H), 7.26(br. s, 1H), 7.12-7.19 (m, 1H), 6.96-7.07 (m, 2H), 4.60 (br. s, 2H),3.80 (s, 3H).

Step 2: Synthesis of4-(2-fluorobenzyl)-1-methyl-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carbonitrile

A mixture containing zinc cyanide (850 mg, 7.3 mmol),tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (420 mg, 0.36 mmol) and6-chloro-4-(2-fluorobenzyl)-1-methyl-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine (1.0 g,3.6 mmol) in DMF (18 mL) was heated to 100° C. for 24 hours. Thereaction mixture was quenched with water (10 mL) and EtOAc (20 mL) andfiltered through a pad of Celite. The filtrate was extracted with EtOAc(100 mL). The organic layer was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered andevaporated to give a solid. The crude material was purified using silicagel chromatography (0-100% EtOAc/hexanes gradient) to give impure4-(2-fluorobenzyl)-1-methyl-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carbonitrile(130 mg) as a white solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) δ (ppm) 8.08 (s, 1H), 7.72 (s, 1H), 7.65-7.71(m, 1H), 7.32 (m, 1H), 6.98-7.09 (m, 2H), 4.64 (s, 2H), 3.92 (s, 3H).

Step 3: Synthesis of4-(2-fluorobenzyl)-1-methyl-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine(I-36)

A mixture containing anhydrous hydrazine (0.092 mL, 2.9 mmol) and4-(2-fluorobenzyl)-1-methyl-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carbonitrile(130 mg) in MeOH (2.5 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 24hours. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo and dried azeotropicallywith MeOH and benzene. The resulting mixture was dissolved in DCM (10mL) and treated with pyridine (0.24 mL, 2.9 mmol) and2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride (0.21 mL, 1.5 mmol). After stirring atambient temperature for 2 hours, the reaction was diluted in EtOAc (100mL) and washed with saturated NaHCO₃ solution (50 mL). The organic layerwas dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and evaporated to give an oil. The crudematerial was purified by preparative HPLC to afford4-(2-fluorobenzyl)-1-methyl-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine(6.3 mg, 0.47% yield over two steps) as a light brown solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 8.57 (s, 1H), 8.41 (s, 1H),7.18-7.28 (m, 2H), 6.97-7.12 (m, 2H), 4.67 (s, 2H), 4.04 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=377.1

Compound I-72

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine(I-72)

The title compound was synthesized in 3 steps.

Step 1: Synthesis of6-bromo-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine

A solution of bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) dichloride (62 mg,0.088 mmol) and 6-bromo-8-chloro-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine (410 mg,1.8 mmol) in THF (5.9 mL) at ambient temperature was purged with argonfor 5 min and treated with (2-fluorobenzyl)zinc(II) chloride (0.5 Msolution in THF, 5.3 mL, 2.6 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 60° C.for 24 hours. The reaction was quenched with saturated NH₄Cl solution(15 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (4×50 mL). The combined organic layerswere washed with brine, dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated invacuo. The crude material was purified using reverse phase HPLC (5-95%acetonitrile/water gradient with 0.1% formic acid) to give6-bromo-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine (110 mg, 43%pure, contaminated with an undesired regioisomer, 9.1% yield) as a brownsolid.

Step 2: Synthesis of8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile

A solid mixture containing zinc dust (4.7 mg, 0.072 mmol), zinc cyanide(63 mg, 0.54 mmol),[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II)dichloromethane adduct (29 mg, 0.036 mmol) and6-bromo-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine (110 mg, 43%pure, 0.15 mmol of desired regioisomer and 0.21 mmol of undesiredregioisomer) was purged with nitrogen for 15 min and then dissolved inDMF (3 mL). The reaction was heated to 120° C. for 8 hours. Theresultant mixture was partitioned between water (10 mL), brine (10 mL)and EtOAc (20 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL).The combined organic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered andconcentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified using silica gelchromatography (20-100% EtOAc/hexanes gradient) to give8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile (24 mg,61% yield) as a light tan solid.

Step 3: Synthesis of8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine(I-72)

A suspension of8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine-6-carbonitrile (24 mg,0.094 mmol) in anhydrous methanol (1.5 mL) was treated with sodiummethoxide (0.50 N solution in methanol, 19 μL, 9.4 μmol). After 3.5hours, anhydrous hydrazine (18 μL, 0.57 mmol) was added and the reactionwas stirred at ambient temperature for 23 hours. The resultant mixturewas concentrated, dried in vacuo and then re-dissolved in DCM/THF (2 mL,3:1 ratio). 2,2,2-Trifluoroacetic anhydride (21 μL, 0.15 mmol). After 40minutes, the mixture was concentrated, dissolved in EtOH (2 mL) andacetic acid (0.2 mL) and heated at 90° C. for 15 hours. The resultantsolution was poured into water (10 mL), neutralized to pH 6 withsaturated NaHCO₃ solution and extracted with EtOAc (2×20 mL). Thecombined organic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered andconcentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by silica gelchromatography (20-90% EtOAc/hexanes gradient) to afford8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine(1.4 mg, 4.1% yield) as a light yellow film.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.43 (s, 1H), 9.22 (s, 1H), 7.47(app. t, 1H), 7.29 (m, 1H), 7.13-7.08 (m, 2H), 4.76 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=364.2

Compound I-37

6-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-9-methyl-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-9H-purine(I-37)

The title compound was synthesized in 3 steps.

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-chloro-6-(2-fluorobenzyl)-9-methyl-9H-purine

To a mixture containing bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) dichloride(240 mg, 0.34 mmol), lithium chloride (290 mg, 6.8 mmol) and2,6-dichloro-9-methyl-9H-purine (690 mg, 3.4 mmol) in THF (17 mL) atambient temperature was added 2-fluorobenzylzinc(II) chloride (0.5 Msolution in THF, 7.5 mL, 3.7 mmol). The reaction was stirred at ambienttemperature for 24 hours. The resultant mixture was diluted with EtOAc(100 mL) and water (100 mL). The organic layer was dried over Na₂SO₄,filtered and evaporated to give an oil. The crude material was purifiedusing silica gel chromatography (0-50% EtOAc/hexanes gradient) to afford2-chloro-6-(2-fluorobenzyl)-9-methyl-9H-purine (620 mg, 66% yield) as awhite solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) δ (ppm) 8.02 (s, 1H), 7.37 (m, 1H), 7.18-7.25(m, 1H), 7.02-7.10 (m, 2H), 4.54 (s, 2H), 3.88 (s, 3H).

Step 2: Synthesis of6-(2-fluorobenzyl)-9-methyl-9H-purine-2-carbonitrile

A mixture containing zinc cyanide (530 mg, 4.5 mmol),tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (260 mg, 0.22 mmol) and2-chloro-6-(2-fluorobenzyl)-9-methyl-9H-purine (620 mg, 2.2 mmol) in DMF(12 mL) was heated to 100° C. for 24 hours. The mixture was quenchedwith water (50 mL) and EtOAc (10 mL) and filtered through a pad ofCelite. The filtrate was extracted with EtOAc (100 mL). The organiclayer was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and evaporated to give an oil. Thecrude material was purified using silica gel chromatography (0-100%EtOAc/hexanes gradient) to afford6-(2-fluorobenzyl)-9-methyl-9H-purine-2-carbonitrile (490 mg, 82% yield)as a white solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) δ (ppm) 8.22 (s, 1H), 7.39 (t, 1H), 7.20-7.26(m, 1H), 7.01-7.12 (m, 2H), 4.61 (s, 2H), 3.95 (s, 3H).

Step 3: Synthesis of6-(2-fluorobenzyl)-9-methyl-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-9H-purine(I-37)

A mixture containing anhydrous hydrazine (0.090 mL, 2.9 mmol) and6-(2-fluorobenzyl)-9-methyl-9H-purine-2-carbonitrile (130 mg, 0.48 mmol)in MeOH (2.4 mL) was heated to 60° C. for 2 hours. The mixture wasconcentrated in vacuo and dried azeotropically with MeOH and benzene.The resulting solid was dissolved in DCM (5.0 mL) and treated withpyridine (0.23 mL, 2.9 mmol) and 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic anhydride (0.20mL, 1.4 mmol). After stirring at ambient temperature for 24 hours, thereaction was diluted with DCM (100 mL) and washed with water (100 mL).The organic layer was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and evaporated to givean oil. The crude material was purified using silica gel chromatography(0-50% EtOAc/hexanes gradient) to recover the2,2,2-trifluoro-N′-((6-(2-fluorobenzyl)-9-methyl-9H-purin-2-yl)(imino)methyl)acetohydrazideintermediate. The solid was combined with MeOH (1.0 mL) and a few dropsof acetic acid. The resultant mixture was heated at 120° C. for 1 hourin a microwave. The mixture was cooled to ambient and concentrated invacuo to give6-(2-fluorobenzyl)-9-methyl-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-9H-purine(25 mg, 14% yield) as a white solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 8.50-8.54 (m, 1H), 7.28-7.41 (m,1H), 7.14-7.27 (m, 1H), 6.97-7.12 (m, 2H), 4.63 (s, 2H), 4.01 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=378.1

Compound I-38 and Compound I-39

General Procedure C:8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(5-methyl-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-38) and8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-methyl-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-39)

To a suspension of8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-methyl-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(69 mg, 0.22 mmol) and potassium carbonate (68 mg, 0.49 mmol) in DMF(3.0 mL) was added 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl trifluoromethanesulfonate (0.050mL, 0.31 mmol). After stirring at ambient temperature for 15 hours, thereaction mixture was poured into a mixture of water and brine (1:2, 20mL) and extracted with DCM (2×20 mL). The combined organic layers weredried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The crude material waspurified using silica gel chromatography (20-100% EtOAc/hexanesgradient) to isolate8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(5-methyl-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-38) (18 mg, 21% yield) as a pale yellow solid and8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-methyl-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-39) (52 mg, 60% yield) as a pale yellow solid. The chemicalstructures were assigned with the aid of ¹H NMR nOe experiments. In thiscase, a potential third regioisomer (usually minor) was not observed.

Compound I-38:

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 9.19 (s, 1H), 8.23 (s, 1H), 7.80 (s,1H), 7.34 (app. t, 1H), 7.27 (m, 1H), 7.17 (app. t, 1H), 7.08 (app. t,1H), 5.34 (q, 2H), 4.56 (s, 2H), 2.53 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=391.2

Compound I-39:

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 9.39 (s, 1H), 8.30 (s, 1H), 7.93 (s,1H), 7.48 (app. t, 1H), 7.35 (m, 1H), 7.21-7.15 (m, 2H), 5.41 (q, 2H),4.64 (s, 2H), 2.31 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=391.2

Compound I-41 and Compound I-42

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-5-methyl-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-41) and8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3-methyl-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-42) were synthesized according to General Procedure C, with theexception that 1-(bromomethyl)-4-fluorobenzene was used as thealkylating agent, as solids (I-41: 1.3 mg, 3.9% yield and 1-42: 2.9 mg,8.6% yield). The reaction conditions (such as reagents ratio,temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

Compound I-41:

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 9.15 (s, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 7.79 (s,1H), 7.32 (m, 3H), 7.21 (m, 4H), 7.08 (app. t, 1H), 5.44 (s, 2H), 4.54(s, 2H), 2.48 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=417.3

Compound I-42:

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 9.34 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 7.91 (s,1H), 7.37 (app. t, 1H), 7.20 (m, 1H), 7.03 (m, 6H), 5.61 (s, 2H), 4.63(s, 2H), 2.25 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=417.4

Compound I-47

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(1-(3-fluorobenzyl)-5-methyl-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-47) was synthesized according to General Procedure C, with theexception that 1-(bromomethyl)-3-fluorobenzene was used as thealkylating agent, as a solid (4.2 mg, 12% yield). The other regioisomerswere not isolated. The reaction conditions (such as reagents ratio,temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.04 (s, 1H), 8.11 (s, 1H), 7.78(s, 1H), 7.38 (m, 1H), 7.23 (m, 2H), 7.06 (m, 5H), 5.47 (s, 2H), 4.65(s, 2H), 2.51 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=417.4

Compound I-48

1-(3-(8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-5-methyl-1H-1,2,4-triazol-1-yl)-3,3-dimethylbutan-2-one(I-48) was synthesized according to General Procedure C, with theexception that 1-bromo-3,3-dimethylbutan-2-one was used as thealkylating agent, as a solid (7.6 mg, 23% yield). The other regioisomerswere not isolated. The reaction conditions (such as reagents ratio,temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 9.15 (s, 1H), 8.22 (s, 1H), 7.79 (s,1H), 7.32 (app. t, 1H), 7.25 (m, 1H), 7.17 (app. t, 1H), 7.08 (app. t,1H), 5.54 (s, 2H), 4.54 (s, 2H), 2.31 (s, 3H), 1.22 (s, 9H).

LCMS [M+H]=407.4

Compound I-50

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(1-(4-fluorobutyl)-5-methyl-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-50) was synthesized according to General Procedure C, with theexception that 1-bromo-4-fluorobutane was used as the alkylating agent,as a solid (0.9 mg, 2.8% yield). The other regioisomers were notisolated. The reaction conditions (such as reagents ratio, temperatureand reaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.03 (s, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 7.81(s, 1H), 7.26 (m, 2H), 7.06 (m, 2H), 4.67 (s, 2H), 4.55 (t, 1H), 4.45(t, 1H), 4.27 (t, 2H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 2.05 (m, 2H), 1.77 (m, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=383.3

Compound I-51

3-((3-(8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-5-methyl-1H-1,2,4-triazol-1-yl)methyl)-5-methylisoxazole(I-51) was synthesized according to General Procedure C, with theexception that 3-(bromomethyl)-5-methylisoxazole was used as thealkylating agent, as a solid (4.1 mg, 13% yield). The other regioisomerswere not isolated. The reaction conditions (such as reagents ratio,temperature and reaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1H), 7.80(s, 1H), 7.26 (m, 2H), 7.08 (m, 1H), 7.04 (m, 1H), 6.20 (s, 1H), 5.50(s, 2H), 4.66 (s, 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 2.42 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=404.3

Compound I-53

6-(1-Ethyl-5-methyl-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl)-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-53) was synthesized according to General Procedure C, with theexception that iodoethane was used as the alkylating agent, as a solid(3.0 mg, 11% yield). The other regioisomers were not isolated. Thereaction conditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature and reactiontime) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.02 (s, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1H), 7.81(s, 1H), 7.25 (m, 2H), 7.08 (m, 1H), 7.04 (m, 1H), 4.67 (s, 2H), 4.26(q, 2H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 1.50 (t, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=337.3

Compound I-54

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(5-methyl-1-(3,3,3-trifluoropropyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-54) was synthesized according to General Procedure C, with theexception that 3-bromo-1,1,1-trifluoropropane was used as the alkylatingagent, as a solid (2.9 mg, 8.8% yield). The other regioisomers were notisolated. The reaction conditions (such as reagents ratio, temperatureand reaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.06 (s, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 7.81(s, 1H), 7.25 (m, 2H), 7.09 (m, 1H), 7.04 (m, 1H), 4.67 (s, 2H), 4.49(t, 2H), 2.94 (m, 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=405.3

Compound I-56

6-(1-Butyl-5-methyl-H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl)-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-56) was synthesized according to General Procedure C, with theexception that 1-bromobutane was used as the alkylating agent, as asolid (2.0 mg, 6.8% yield). The other regioisomers were not isolated.The reaction conditions (such as reagents ratio, temperature andreaction time) were modified as needed.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.02 (s, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 7.80(s, 1H), 7.26 (m, 2H), 7.08 (m, 1H), 7.04 (m, 1H), 4.67 (s, 2H), 4.22(t, 2H), 2.55 (s, 3H), 1.90 (app. quin, 2H), 1.41 (m, 2H), 1.00 (t, 3H).

LCMS [M+H]=365.3

Compound I-57

5-(8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-amine(I-57)

A suspension of S-methylisothiourea hemisulfate salt (510 mg, 1.8 mmol),8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carboximidhydrazide (520 mg,1.8 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (73 mg, 1.8 mmol) in water (8 mL) washeated to 120° C. for 60 minutes in the microwave. The reaction mixturewas filtered using methanol as the eluent, and the resulting filtratewas concentrated to afford the crude product. This material was purifiedby reverse phase HPLC (12-37% acetonitrile/water gradient with 0.1%trifluoroacetic acid) to afford an orange oil which was a mixture of 2compounds (360 mg). This product mixture was used in subsequentreactions without further purification.

A small sample of this material was further purified on reverse phaseHPLC (10-55% acetonitrile/water gradient with 0.1% formic acid) toafford5-(8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-amine(I-57) (3.0 mg) as a white solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 12.1 (br. s, 1H), 8.92 (br. s, 1H),8.21 (s, 1H), 7.77 (s, 1H), 7.35-7.40 (m, 1H), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H),7.15-7.19 (m, 1H), 7.06-7.11 (m, 1H), 6.09 (s, 2H), 4.53 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=310.1

Compound I-58

1-(3-Fluorobenzyl)-3-(8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-amine(I-58)

To a solution of crude5-(8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-amine(360 mg) in DMF (4 mL) was added 1-(bromomethyl)-3-fluorobenzene (0.11mL, 0.88 mmol) followed by potassium carbonate (210 mg, 1.6 mmol). Thereaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 16 hours andthen heated to 50° C. for 24 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled toambient temperature, diluted with water (50 mL) and extracted with EtOAc(4×30 mL). The combined organic phases were dried over Na₂SO₄, filteredand concentrated to afford a brown residue. First pass purification ofthe crude product by silica gel chromatography afforded a mixture.Further purification of this material by reverse phase HPLC (10-60%acetonitrile/water gradient with 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid) afforded1-(3-fluorobenzyl)-3-(8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-amine(I-58) (6.9 mg), as a pale yellow solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 9.01 (s, 1H), 8.22 (s, 1H), 7.81 (s,1H), 7.40-7.44 (m, 1H), 7.30-7.34 (m, 1H), 7.24-7.27 (m, 1H), 7.12-7.18(m, 2H), 7.06-7.10 (m, 3H), 6.78 (br. s, 2H), 5.25 (s, 2H), 4.52 (s,2H).

LCMS [M+H]=418.3

Compound I-59 and Compound I-60

3-(8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-amine(I-59) and5-(8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-amine(I-60)

A suspension of crude5-(8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-amine(550 mg), 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl trifluoromethanesulfonate (0.30 mL, 2.2mmol) and potassium carbonate (540 mg, 3.90 mmol) in DMF (4 mL) wasstirred for 16 hours at ambient temperature. The reaction mixture wasthen diluted with water (50 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3×50 mL). Thecombined organic phases were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered andconcentrated to afford a residue. First pass purification was achievedby silica gel chromatography (0-100% EtOAc/hexanes gradient). A secondpurification using silica gel chromatography (0-50% acetonitrile/MeOH(7:1) in DCM gradient) afforded5-(8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-amine(I-60) (40 mg) as a gold solid. Compound I-59 was detected in thiscampaign, but not isolated.

In a second campaign, crude5-(8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-amine(330 mg), 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl trifluoromethanesulfonate (0.18 mL, 1.3mmol), and potassium carbonate (320 mg, 2.4 mmol) in DMF (4 mL) werecombined to afford a similar mixture of products. Purification of thisreaction mixture using reverse phase HPLC (10-55% acetonitrile/watergradient with 0.1% formic acid) afforded3-(8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-amine(I-59) (3.5 mg) as a white solid.

Compound I-60:

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 9.19 (s, 1H), 8.31 (d, 1H), 7.92 (d,1H), 7.45-7.50 (m, 1H), 7.30-7.36 (m, 1H), 7.14-7.20 (m, 2H), 5.64 (s,2H), 5.21 (q, 2H), 4.62 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=392.2

Compound I-59:

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 8.98 (s, 1H), 8.22 (s, 1H), 7.78 (s,1H), 7.30-7.34 (m, 1H), 7.24-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.15-7.19 (m, 1H), 7.06-7.09(m, 1H), 6.76 (s, 2H), 4.98 (q, 2H), 4.43 (s, 2H). The regiochemicalassignments were confirmed by ¹H NMR nOe experiments (˜3% nOe existsbetween CH₂CF₃ protons and NH₂ group).

LCMS [M+H]=392.2

Compound I-62 and Compound I-63

6-(3-Chloro-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-62) and6-(3-(1H-imidazol-1-yl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-63)

A solution containing8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carboximidhydrazide (140 mg,0.51 mmol) and 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (CDI) (410 mg, 2.5 mmol) in THF(4 mL) was stirred at ambient temperature for 40 hours. A tan suspensionwas observed. DCM/MeOH (60 mL, 1:1 ratio) was added and the resultantmixture was gently warmed to dissolve the solids. The crude mixture wasconcentrated and dried in vacuo. Phosphoryl trichloride (3.0 mL, 32mmol) was added and the resultant mixture was heated at 120° C. for 16hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated, carefully treated with iceand neutralized with saturated NaHCO₃ solution. The crude mixture wasextracted with DCM/isopropanol (5:1 ratio, 3×20 mL). The combinedorganic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated invacuo. Purification by silica gel chromatography (0-25%acetonitrile/MeOH (7:1) in DCM) afforded the title compounds 1-62 (23mg, 14% yield, first eluting product) as an off-white solid and 1-63 (18mg, 9.9% yield, second eluting side product) as a light tan solid.

Compound I-62:

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 14.9 (s, 1H), 9.31 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s,1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.43 (app. t, 1H), 7.27 (m, 1H), 7.17 (app. t, 1H),7.09 (app. t, 1H), 4.58 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=329.2

Compound I-63:

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 14.8 (s, 1H), 9.36 (s, 1H), 8.32 (m,2H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 7.76 (s, 1H), 7.43 (app. t, 1H), 7.28 (m, 1H),7.20-7.15 (m, 2H), 7.10 (app. t, 1H), 4.60 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=361.3

Compound I-64 and Compound I-65

rac-6-(3-(2,2-Difluorocyclopropyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-64) and5-(8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)-N,N-dimethyl-1H-1,2,4-triazol-3-amine(I-65)

A solution of rac-2,2-difluorocyclopropane-1-carboxylic acid (89 mg,0.70 mmol) in DMF (2.0 mL) was treated successively with HATU (400 mg,1.0 mmol) and 4-methylmorpholine (0.23 mL, 2.1 mmol). The amber colorsolution was stirred at ambient temperature for 30 minutes and thenadded to 8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carboximidhydrazide(200 mg, 0.70 mmol) with the aid of 0.50 mL of DMF. After 18 hours, thereaction was diluted with EtOAc (100 mL) and water (50 mL). The aqueouslayer was back-extracted with EtOAc (25 mL). The combined organic layerswere washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated invacuo to yield2,2-difluoro-N′-((8-(2-fluorobenzyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-6-yl)(imino)methyl)cyclopropane-1-carbohydrazide(400 mg, >99% yield) as a brown solid which was used without furthermanipulations. This intermediate was suspended in ethanol (10 mL) andacetic acid (1.0 mL). The reaction was heated at 90° C. for 15.5 hours.Contents were concentrated in vacuo and the resulting residue waspurified twice by silica gel chromatography (20-10% EtOAc/hexanesgradient and 0-4% acetonitrile/MeOH (7:1) in DCM gradient) andre-purified by reverse phase HPLC (5-95% acetonitrile/water with 0.1%formic acid) to deliver the title compounds 1-64 (51 mg, 19% yield,first eluting product) as a white solid and 1-65 (20 mg, 8.5% yield,second eluting side-product) as an off-white solid.

Compound I-64:

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.12 (s, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H), 7.83(s, 1H), 7.32 (m, 1H), 7.25 (m, 1H), 7.11-7.02 (m, 2H), 4.67 (s, 2H),2.97 (m, 1H), 2.17 (m, 1H), 2.00 (m, 1H).

LCMS [M+H]=371.2

Compound I-65:

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.08 and 8.98 (s, 1H, tautomers),8.13 and 8.10 (s, 1H, tautomers), 7.87 and 7.77 (s, 1H, tautomers),7.36-7.16 (m, 2H), 7.13-6.98 (m, 2H), 4.64 (s, 2H), 3.09 and 3.03 (s,6H, tautomers).

LCMS [M+H]=338.2

Compound I-66

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-3-iodo-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-66)

A solution of8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(99 mg, 0.27 mmol) in DMF (2.0 mL) was treated with N-iodosuccinimide(92 mg, 0.41 mmol) and heated to 60° C. for 40 hours. The reactionmixture was concentrated and purified by silica gel chromatography (0-5%acetonitrile/MeOH (7:1) in DCM gradient) to afford the title compound(I-66) (130 mg, 96% yield) as a white solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 15.6 (s, 1H), 8.79 (s, 1H), 8.04 (s,1H), 7.41 (app. t, 1H), 7.27 (m, 1H), 7.18 (app. t, 1H), 7.08 (app. t,1H), 4.62 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=489.2

Compound I-67

3-Chloro-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-67)

A solution of8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(99 mg, 0.27 mmol) in DMF (2.0 mL) was treated with N-chlorosuccinimide(55 mg, 0.41 mmol) and heated to 60° C. for 24 hours. The reactionmixture was concentrated and purified by silica gel chromatography(0-20% acetonitrile/MeOH (7:1) in DCM gradient) to afford the titlecompound (I-67) (56 mg, 51% yield) as a white solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.04 (s, 1H), 7.88 (s, 1H), 7.39(app. t, 1H), 7.26 (m, 1H), 7.08 (m, 2H), 4.70 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=397.2

Compound I-68

3-Fluoro-8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-68)

A solution of8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(100 mg, 0.28 mmol) in acetonitrile (3.0 mL) was treated with1-chloromethyl-4-fluoro-1,4-diazoniabicyclo[2.2.2]octanebis(tetrafluoroborate) (Selectfluor®) (120 mg, 0.34 mmol) and heated to70° C. for 6 hours. Additional amount of Selectfluor® (60 mg, 0.17 mmol)was added and heating was continued at 70° C. for 3 hours. The reactionmixture was concentrated and purified by silica gel chromatography(0-20% acetonitrile/MeOH (7:1) in DCM gradient) to afford the titlecompounds 1-68 (10 mg, 9.4% yield) as a white solid.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 8.96 (s, 1H), 7.56 (d, 1H), 7.39(app. t, 1H), 7.25 (m, 1H), 7.08 (m, 2H), 4.65 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=381.2

Compound I-70

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine-3-carbonitrile(I-70)

A solid mixture comprised of8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-3-iodo-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(49 mg, 0.10 mmol), zinc cyanide (18 mg, 0.15 mmol),[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (3.7 mg, 5.0μmol), and zinc powder (1.3 mg, 0.020 mmol) was flushed with nitrogenfor 15 minutes. DMF (2 mL) was added and the reaction was heated at 120°C. in a microwave for 7.5 hours during which additional amounts of thepalladium catalyst (3.7 mg) and zinc cyanide (24 mg) were added to drivethe reaction. The crude mixture was cooled to ambient temperature,diluted with EtOAc (10 mL) and filtered through a bed of Celite withEtOAc (20 mL). The organic filtrate was washed with water/brine (2×10mL, 10:1 ratio) and brine (10 mL), dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered andconcentrated in vacuo. Purification by silica gel chromatography (0-10%acetonitrile/MeOH (7:1) in DCM gradient) afforded the title compoundI-70 as an off-white solid (15 mg, 38% yield).

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 9.23 (s, 1H), 8.44 (s, 1H), 7.41(app. t, 1H), 7.26 (m, 1H), 7.10-7.05 (m, 2H), 4.74 (s, 2H).

LCMS [M+H]=388.3

Compound I-71

8-(2-Fluorobenzyl)-3-methyl-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(I-71)

A solid mixture comprised of8-(2-fluorobenzyl)-3-iodo-6-(3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-1,2,4-triazol-5-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazine(71 mg, 0.15 mmol), potassium carbonate (60 mg, 0.44 mmol) andtetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (17 mg, 0.015 mmol) was flushedwith nitrogen for 5 minutes. DME (3.5 mL) and water (0.5 mL) were addedfollowed by trimethylboroxine (37 μL, 0.29 mmol). The reaction washeated at 100° C. for 5 hours and then at 120° C. for 1 hour. Additionalamounts of the palladium catalyst (17 mg) and trimethylboroxine (37 μL)were added and the reaction was heated at 120° C. for 40 hours. Thecrude mixture was cooled to ambient temperature, poured into water (20mL) and neutralized to pH 7 with 1 N HCl solution. The aqueous mixturewas extracted with EtOAc (2×20 mL). The combined organic phases weredried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification bysilica gel chromatography (0-40% EtOAc/hexanes gradient) and reversephase HPLC (30-80% acetonitrile/water gradient with 0.1% formic acid)afforded the title compound I-71 as a white solid (16 mg, 29% yield).

¹H NMR (500 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ (ppm) 8.99 (s, 1H), 7.66 (s, 1H), 7.33(app. t, 1H), 7.24 (m, 1H), 7.11-7.03 (m, 2H), 4.67 (s, 2H), 2.63 (s,3H).

LCMS [M+H]=377.2

Example 2a: Biological Activity Measurement by the cGMP GloSensorCell-Based Assay, 384-Well Format

Human embryonic kidney cells (HEK293) cells expressing GloSensor™ 40FcGMP (Part No: CS 182801, Promega) were used to evaluate the activity oftest compounds. The luminescent biosensors (engineered luciferase) thatwere incorporated into these cells detect cGMP formed by the compoundsstimulating the sGC enzyme and emit luminescence.

cGMP GloSensor cells were maintained in Dulbecco's Modification ofEagle's Medium (DMEM) supplemented with fetal bovine serum (FBS, 10%final) and hygromycine (200 ug/ml). The day before assay, cells wereplated in DMEM with 10% FBS in a 50 μL volume at a density of 1.5×10⁴cells/well in a poly-D-lysine coated 384-well flat white-bottom plate(Corning Cat No 35661). Cells were incubated overnight at 37° C. in ahumidified chamber with 5% CO₂. The next day, medium was removed andcells were replaced with 40 ul/well of GloSensor™, 2 mM (Promega Cat NoE1291). Cells were treated for 90 minutes at 25° C. to allow thesubstrate to equilibrate in the cells. Test compounds andDiethylenetriamine NONOate (DETA-NONOate, or DETA-NO) was diluted to 3mM (20×) in serum-free CO₂ independent medium and serially diluted at 4×dilutions to create 5× dose curve from which 10 ul was added to thewells (x μM concentration for test compound solution and 10 μMconcentration for DETA-NONOate solution; wherein x is one of thefollowing final concentrations: 30000 nM, 7500 nM, 1875 nM, 468.8 nM,117.2 nM, 29.29 nM, 7.320 nM, 1.830 nM, 0.460 nM, 0.114 nM, and 0.029nM).

For the kinetics studies, luminescence was measured right away for 0.2sec per well with Envision (Perkin Elmer). For endpoint SAR screening,data were collected after 55 min incubation at room temperature.

Data were normalized to a high control using the following equation:100*(Sample−Low Control)/(High Control−Low Control), where the lowcontrol is the average of 16 samples treated with 1% DMSO, and the highcontrol is the average of 16 samples treated with 30 μM of Compound Ydepicted below. Data were fit using a 4-parameter fit (log(agonist) vs.response-variable slope) using GraphPad Prism Software v.5. n=2 for allcompounds. The Absolute (Abs) EC₅₀ was interpolated from the curve fitand is defined as the concentration at which a given compound elicits50% of the high control response after data normalization as indicatedabove. Compounds failing to elicit a minimum response of 50% arereported as >30 μM or ND. For compounds run in duplicate or n higherthan 2, the result herein given is the geometric mean of the severalresults obtained. Table 2a summarizes results obtained for selectedcompounds of the invention in this assay.

TABLE 2a Whole cell activity in the GloSensor cell-based assay, 384-wellformat (Example 2a) Compound Abs EC50 (nM) I-1 A I-2 A I-3 B I-4 B I-5 AI-6 B I-7 B I-8 A I-9 A I-10 A I-11 B I-12 B I-13 C I-14 A I-15 B I-16 AI-17 A I-18 A I-19 C I-20 C I-21 A I-22 A I-23 A I-24 A I-25 A I-26 AI-27 A I-28 A I-29 A I-30 A I-31 B I-32 C I-33 A I-34 A I-35 A I-36 CI-37 C I-38 A I-39 I-41 A I-42 C I-47 A I-48 A I-50 B I-51 A I-53 B I-54B I-56 A I-57 B I-58 A I-59 A I-60 C I-62 A I-63 B I-64 B I-65 B I-66 BI-67 A I-68 A I-70 B I-71 A I-72 C sGC enzyme activity values in HEKcells, determined by the GloSensor assay. (-) Code definitions for thesGC enzyme activity values, expressed as Absolute EC₅₀ which is definedas the concentration at which a given compound elicits 50% of the highcontrol response (Compound Y) after data normalization: Abs EC50 ≤ 100nM = A; 100 nM <Abs EC50 ≤ 1000 nM = B; 1000 nM <Abs EC50 = C. Compoundsfailing to elicit a minimum response of 50% are reported as >30 μM orND.

Example 2b: Biological Activity Measurement by the cGMP GloSensorCell-Based Assay, 384-Well Format

HEK293 cells expressing GloSensor™ 40F cGMP (Part No: CS 182801,Promega) were used to evaluate the synergy of the test compounds withNO. Multiple assays where run in which the concentrations of testcompound also well as the concentration of Diethylenetriamine NONOate(DETA-NONOate) were varied to determine the synergy of the test compoundwith NO. Test compounds and Diethylenetriamine NONOate (DETA-NONOate orDETA-NO) were diluted to 3 mM (20×) in serum-free CO₂ independent mediumand serially diluted at 4× dilutions to create 5× dose curve from which10 ul was added to the wells (x μM concentration for test compoundsolution and y μM concentration for DETA-NO solution; wherein x is oneof the following final concentrations: 30000 nM, 7500 nM, 1875 nM, 468.8nM, 117.2 nM, 29.29 nM, 7.320 nM, 1.830 nM, 0.460 nM, 0.114 nM, and0.029 nM and y is one of the following final concentrations: 30 μM, 10μM, 3.33 μM 1.11 μM, and 0 μM).

Following the analysis as described above, Table 2b summarizes resultsobtained for Compound I-1 with the various DETA-NO amount in this assay.

TABLE 2b Whole cell activity in the GloSensor cell-based assay, 384-wellformat (Example 2b) [DETA-NO] 30 uM 10 uM 3.33 uM 1.11 uM 0 uM I-1-EC₅₀A B B B B sGC enzyme activity values in HEK cells, determined by theGloSensor assay. (~) Code definitions for the sGC enzyme activityvalues, expressed as Absolute EC₅₀ which is defined as the concentrationat which a given compound elicits 50% of the high control response(Compound Y) after data normalization: Abs EC50 ≤ 100 nM = A; 100 nM <Abs EC50 ≤ 1000 nM = B; 1000 nM < Abs EC50 = C. Compounds failing toelicit a minimum response of 50% are reported as > 30 μM or ND.

As shown in Table 2b, Compound I-1 synergizes with NO to stimulate sGC.

Example 3. Biological Activity Measurement by the cGMP NeuronalCell-Based Assay

Rat primary neurons were isolated from fetuses of 18-day pregnantSprague-Dawley females. The fetuses were collected in Hanks' balancedsalt solution (HBSS) and brains were rapidly removed. The cerebralhippocampi were isolated and mechanically fragmented. Further tissuedigestion was performed with 0.25% (wt/vol) trypsin solution in HBSSwithout Ca2+ and Mg2+ for 15 min at 37° C. After trypsination, cellswere washed and resuspended in neurobasal medium supplemented with 0.5mM L-glutamine, 12.5 uM glutamic acid, 2% B-27 and 100 U/mL penicillin,and 100 μg/mL streptomycin. Cells were plated at a density of 4×10⁴cells/well in a poly-D-lysine coated 384-well flat clear-bottom plate(Corning Cat No 354662). Cells were incubated 6-7 days at 37° C. in ahumidified chamber with 5% CO₂. Media was removed and cells were washed1× with HBSS containing Ca2+ and Mg2+, and replaced with 40 uL HBSScontaining 0.5 mM IBMX, and incubated for 15 minutes at 37° C. 10 uL ofa 5× stock of test compounds with diethylenetriamine NONOate (DETA-NO)was added. Final concentration of DETA-NO was 30 M. Cells were incubatedfor 20 min at 37° C. Medium was removed, 50 uL of ice-cold 10% aceticacid was added, and incubated for 60 minutes at 4° C. Followingcentrifugation at 4° C. for 5 minutes at 1000×g to pellet cell debris,the supernatant was aspirated to a clean plate and the samples wereanalyzed for cGMP content. cGMP concentrations were determined from eachsample using LC-MS/MS.

Data were normalized to a high control using the following equation:100*(Sample−LowControl)/(High Control−Low Control), where the lowcontrol is the average of 15 samples treated with 1% DMSO, and the highcontrol is the average of 15 samples treated with 10 μM a known sGCstimulator Compound Y. Data were fit using a 4-parameter fit(log(agonist) vs. response-variable slope) using GraphPad Prism Softwarev.5. n=2 for all compounds. The Absolute EC₅₀ was interpolated from thecurve fit and is defined as the concentration at which a given compoundelicits 50% of the high control response. Compounds failing to elicit aminimum response of 50% are reported as >30 μM. For compounds run induplicate or n higher than 2, the result herein given is the geometricmean of the several results obtained. Table 3 summarizes resultsobtained for selected compounds of the invention in this assay.

TABLE 3 Biological activity in the cGMP neuronal cell-based assay(Example 3) Compound Abs EC50 (nM) I-1 A I-6 A I-7 B I-10 A I-11 A I-14A I-2 A I-3 A I-5 A I-8 A I-9 A I-12 B I-13 C I-15 B I-16 ANeuronal-based cell assay. AbsEC50 ≤ 100 nM = A; 100 nM < AbsEC50 ≤ 1000nM = B; 1000 nM < AbsEC50 = C. Compounds failing to elicit a minimumresponse of 50% are reported as > 30 μM or ND.

Example 4: Rat Cerebrospinal Fluid (CSF) Pharmacokinetic Properties

Protocol.

PK in rats was determined following oral dosing. For the oral (PO)experiments, a group of 6 male Sprague-Dawley rats with an indwellingcatheter placed in the cisterna magna were used. The PO group was dosedwith 10 mg/kg or 1 mg/kg of a compound formulated as a solution inPEG400. PO doses were administered by oral gavage and delivered to thestomach using a syringe and gavage tube. Following oral dosageadministration, the gavage tube was flushed with approximately 0.5 mL ofwater to ensure complete delivery of the full dose.

Plasma samples were collected as follows: samples of CSF and blood werecollected at 1 hour, 2, and optionally at 4 hours post-dosing. CSFsamples (0.05 mL) were collected through the intracisternal catheter.Blood samples (0.25 mL) were collected through retro-orbital sampling.These samples were kept on ice until processed for plasma. Blood sampleswere centrifuged at 3200 rpm for 5 minutes at approximately 5° C. within1 hour of collection. Plasma was directly transferred to a 96-well platetube (0.125 mL). Plug caps were placed on the tubes and the tubes frozenat approximately −70° C. and stored until analysis. Plasma was collectedand analyzed for the presence of a compound.

Quantitation of Compounds.

The compound in question and the internal standard were extracted fromplasma and CSF by precipitation. Samples were analyzed using liquidchromatography (LC) with tandem mass spectrometric detection (MS/MS)using electrospray ionization. The standard curve range was from 1 to1000 ng/mL. Results of the compounds described herein in this assay areillustrated in Table 4a below (10 mg/kg dose) and Tables 4b and 4c below(1 mg/kg).

Kp,uu is defined as the concentration ratio of unbound drug in CSF tounbound drug in plasma. Unbound drug in plasma (or free plasmaconcentration) is calculated by multiplying the total plasmaconcentration by the unbound fraction as determined by plasma proteinbinding. The CSF concentration is then divided by the free plasmaconcentration to determine the Kp,uu. (See e.g., Di et al., J. Med.Chem., 56, 2-12 (2013))

TABLE 4a CSF PK properties of select compounds described herein (Example4) at a 10 mg/kg dose. Compound CSF Conc. (nM @ 1 h) Kp, uu (@ 1 h) I-1210 0.9 I-10 108 3.1 I-11 72 2.1 I-14 284 1.7 I-2 59 0.9 I-3 6 0.8 I-16272 1.6 I-27 41 0.2 I-28 20 0.2

TABLE 4b CSF Concentration of a select compound described herein(Example 4) at a 1 mg/kg dose. CSF Conc. (nM) Cmpd @ 1 h @ 2 h @ 4 h I-121 35 39

TABLE 4c Kp, uu of a select compound described herein (Example 4) at a 1mg/kg dose. Kp, uu Cmpd @ 1 h @ 2 h @ 4 h I-1 1.0 1.4 1.9

Example 5: Dog Cerebrospinal Fluid (CSF) Pharmacokinetic Properties

Protocol. PK in dogs was determined following oral dosing. A group of 4male beagle dogs were used and the dogs were dosed with 1 mg/kg of acompound formulated as a suspension in 1% HPMC E5, 0.2% Tween 80, and0.5% MC in water. PO doses were administered by oral gavage in a gelatincapsule and delivered to the stomach using a gavage tube. Following oraldosage administration, the gavage tube was flushed with approximately 10mL of water to ensure complete delivery of the full dose.

Plasma and CSF samples were collected as follows: samples of CSF andblood were collected at 1, 2, 4 and 8 hours post PO dosing. CSF samples(0.05 mL) were collected from the lumbosacral region (L4/5) via directneedle puncture at the appropriate time points. Blood samples (0.25 mL)were collected via cephalic vein. These samples were kept on ice untilprocessed for plasma. Blood samples were centrifuged at 3200 rpm for 5minutes at approximately 5° C. within 1 hour of collection. Plasma wasdirectly transferred to a 96-well plate tube (0.125 mL). Plug caps wereplaced on the tubes and the tubes frozen at approximately −70° C. andstored until analysis. Plasma was collected and analyzed for thepresence of a compound.

Quantitation of Compounds. The compound of the invention and theinternal standard were extracted from plasma and CSF by precipitation.Samples were analyzed using liquid chromatography (LC) with tandem massspectrometric detection (MS/MS) using electrospray ionization. Thestandard curve range was from 1 to 1000 ng/mL. Results of the compoundsdescribed herein in this assay are illustrated in Tables 5a and 5b below(1 mg/kg dose).

Kp,uu is defined as the concentration ratio of unbound drug in CSF tounbound drug in plasma. Unbound drug in plasma (or free plasmaconcentration) is calculated by multiplying the total plasmaconcentration by the unbound fraction as determined by plasma proteinbinding. The CSF concentration is then divided by the free plasmaconcentration to determine the Kp,uu. (See e.g., Di et al., J. Med.Chem., 56, 2-12 (2013))

TABLE 5a CSF Concentration of a select compound described herein(Example 5) at a 1 mg/kg dose. CSF Conc. (nM) Cmpd @ 1 h @ 2 h @ 4 h @ 8h I-1 34 34 19 2.4

TABLE 5b Kp, uu of a select compound described herein (Example 5) at a 1mg/kg dose. Kp, uu Cmpd @ 1h @ 2 h @ 4 h @ 8 h I-1 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.4

Example 6: Non-Human Primate (NHP) Cerebrospinal Fluid (CSF)Pharmacokinetic Properties

Protocol.

PK in NHP was determined following intravenous and oral dosing. For theintravenous (IV) experiments, a group of 4 male Cynomolgus monkeys wereused. The IV group was dosed with 0.3 mg/kg of a compound formulated asa solution in 10% PEG-400, 25% of a 20% Solutol HS 15 in Water, and 65%DPBS. IV doses were administered by injection and delivered via catheterinto the cephalic vein. For the oral (PO) experiments, a group of 4 maleCynomolgus monkeys were used. The PO group was dosed with 1 mg/kg of acompound formulated as a suspension in 1% HPMC E5, 0.2% Tween 80, 0.5%MC in water. PO doses were administered by oral gavage and delivered viagelatin capsule.

Plasma and CSF samples were collected as follows: samples of CSF andblood were collected at 1, 4 and 24 hours post IV dosing and 2, 8 and 24hours post PO dosing. CSF samples (0.05 mL) were collected either thecisterna magna (primary site) or the lumbosacral region (L4/5) viadirect needle puncture at the appropriate time points. Blood samples(0.25 mL) were collected from a peripheral vein. These samples were kepton ice until processed for plasma. Blood samples were centrifuged at3200 rpm for 5 minutes at approximately 5° C. within 1 hour ofcollection. Plasma was directly transferred to a 96-well plate tube(0.125 mL). Plug caps were placed on the tubes and the tubes frozen atapproximately −70° C. and stored until analysis. Plasma was collectedand analyzed for the presence of a compound.

Quantitation of Compounds.

The compound of the invention and the internal standard were extractedfrom plasma and CSF by precipitation. Samples were analyzed using liquidchromatography (LC) with tandem mass spectrometric detection (MS/MS)using electrospray ionization. The standard curve range was from 1 to1000 ng/mL. Results of the compounds described herein in this assay areillustrated in Tables 6a and 6b below (0.3 mg/kg IV dose, 1 mg/kg POdose).

Kp,uu is defined as the concentration ratio of unbound drug in CSF tounbound drug in plasma. Unbound drug in plasma (or free plasmaconcentration) is calculated by multiplying the total plasmaconcentration by the unbound fraction as determined by plasma proteinbinding. The CSF concentration is then divided by the free plasmaconcentration to determine the Kp,uu. (See e.g., Di et al., J. Med.Chem., 56, 2-12 (2013))

TABLE 6a CSF Concentration of a select compound described herein(Example 6) at a 0.3 mg/kg IV and 1 mg/kg PO dose. CSF Conc. (nM) @ 1 h,@ 2 h, @ 4 h, @ 8 h, @ 24 h, @ 24 h, Cmpd IV PO IV PO IV PO I-1 27 42 2031 6 11

TABLE 6b Kp,uu of a select compound described herein (Example 6) at a0.3 mg/kg IV and 1 mg/kg PO dose. Kp,uu @ 1 h, @ 2 h, @ 4 h, @ 8 h, @ 24h, @ 24 h, Cmpd IV PO IV PO IV PO I-1 1.8 1.8 3.0 2.5 2.8 2.1

Example 7: Rat Cerebrospinal Fluid (CSF) Biomarker Measurement

This experiment was to determine the effect of different doses of acompound of the invention on the cGMP response as well as the compoundconcentration in rat CSF and compound concentration in rat plasma.

Protocol.

Each rat was sampled one time or multiple times with 3 or more days inbetween each dosing.

Day Before the Experiment.

Fast rats overnight with ad libitum access to water.

Day of the Experiment.

Compound and cyclic guanosine monophosphate (cGMP) in rat CSF wasdetermined following oral dosing. Male Sprague-Dawley rats with anindwelling catheter placed in the cisterna magna were used. The ratswere dosed with 0 mg/kg (n=15), 3 mg/kg (n=19) and 10 mg/kg (n=20) of acompound of the invention formulated as a suspension in 0.5%methylcellulose, 0.5% Tween80. PO doses were administered by oral gavageand delivered to the stomach using a syringe and gavage tube. Followingoral dosage administration, the gavage tube was flushed withapproximately 0.5 mL of water to ensure complete delivery of the fulldose.

Plasma and CSF samples were collected under isoflurane anesthesia asfollows: samples of CSF were collected at 1 hour and 6 hours post-dosingand samples of blood were collected 1 h post-dosing. CSF samples werecollected through the intracisternal catheter. Approximately 20 μL ofCSF and discard (dead volume is 14-16 μL); then withdraw approximately50 μL of CSF in eppendorf tubes containing 5 μL of glacial acetic acid.Snap freeze CSF by immersion in liquid nitrogen. Blood samples (0.25 mL)were collected through retro-orbital sampling. These samples were kepton ice until processed for plasma. Blood samples were centrifuged at3200 rpm for 10 minutes at approximately 5° C. within 1 hour ofcollection. Plasma was directly transferred to a 96-well plate tube(0.125 mL). Plug caps were placed on the tubes and the tubes frozen atapproximately −70° C. and stored until analysis. Plasma was collectedand analyzed for the presence of a compound.

Quantitation of Compounds and cGMP.

The compound of the invention, cGMP and the internal standard wereextracted from plasma and CSF by precipitation. Samples were analyzedusing liquid chromatography (LC) with tandem mass spectrometricdetection (MS/MS) using electrospray ionization. The standard curverange was from 1 to 1000 ng/mL. Results of the compounds describedherein in this assay are illustrated in Table 7 below (3 and 10 mg/kgdose). Statistics were determined by planned comparison t-tests.

Kp,uu is defined as the concentration ratio of unbound drug in CSF tounbound drug in plasma. Unbound drug in plasma (or free plasmaconcentration) is calculated by multiplying the total plasmaconcentration by the unbound fraction as determined by plasma proteinbinding. The CSF concentration is then divided by the free plasmaconcentration to determine the Kp,uu. (See e.g., Di et al., J. Med.Chem., 56, 2-12 (2013)).

TABLE 7 CSF PK properties of select compounds described herein (Example7) at a 3 and 10 mg/kg dose. Compound, Dose CSF Conc. (nM @ 1 h) CSFConc. (nM @ 6 h) I-1, 0 mg/kg 3.9 4.7 I-1, 3 mg/kg 7.2* 6.7 I-1, 10mg/kg 14.8** 13.8* *p < than 0.05 vs. vehicle; **p < than 0.01 vs.vehicle

Conclusions.

Acute dosing of 3 mg/Kg Compound I-1 P.O. in rat induced a significantincrease of cGMP in rat CSF 1 h after dosing. Acute dosing of 10 mg/KgCompound I-1 P.O. in rat induced a significant increase of cGMP in ratCSF 1 h and 6 h after dosing.

Example 8: Evaluation of Compounds of the Invention on SynapticTransmission and Plasticity Impairments in R6/2 Mice Hippocampal Slices

Improvements in synaptic transmission and plasticity, as measured bylong term potentiation (LTP), is believed to indicate the potential of acompound to enhance memory. LTP is an electrophysiological phenomenathat is commonly referred to as the a cellular phenomenon drivinglearning and memory.

Protocol.

Preparation of Acute Mice Hippocampal Slices.

Experiments were carried out with 11 to 12 week-old R6/2 and WT miceprovided by the Jackson Laboratory (USA). Hippocampal slices (350 μmthickness) were cut with a Macllwain tissue chopper in an ice-coldoxygenated sucrose solution (Saccharose 250, Glucose 11, NaHCO₃ 26, KCl2, NaH₂PO₄ 1.2, MgCl₂ 7, and CaCl₂ 0.5 in mM). The slices were incubated1 hour at room temperature in ACSF of the following composition: Glucose11, NaHCO₃ 25, NaCl 126, KCl 3.5, NaH₂PO₄ 1.2, MgCl₂ 1.3, and CaCl₂ 2 inmM. Then, the slices were let to recover for at least 1 h.

Slice Perfusion and Temperature Control.

During the experiments, the slices were continuously perfused with theACSF (bubbled with 95% O₂-5% CO₂) at the rate of 3 mL/min with aperistaltic pump (MEA chamber volume: ˜1 mL). Complete solution exchangein the MEA chamber was achieved 20 s after the switch of solutions. Theperfusion liquid was continuously pre-heated at 37° C. just beforereaching the MEA chamber with a heated-perfusion cannula (PH01,MultiChannel Systems, Reutlingen, Germany). The temperature of the MEAchamber was maintained at 37±0.1° C. with a heating element located inthe MEA amplifier headstage.

Stimulation Protocols/Compound Application.

Input/Output (I/O) curve: from 100 to 800 μA, by 100 μA steps. Thestimulus intensity was then set to a fixed value of 250 μA for theshort- and long-term synaptic plasticity measurements.

Short-Term Plasticity Properties:

two pulses with a decreasing inter-stimuli interval (e.g. 300 ms, 200ms, 100 ms, 50 ms, 25 ms) were applied. Compound application: fEPSP wererecorded for 10 minutes in control conditions (to verify the baselinesteadiness) followed by a 15-minute exposure to the compound (or 25minutes in the presence of vehicle only for control slices). A secondI/O protocol and paired-pulse protocol were applied, as describedpreviously, in the continuous presence of the compound.

Long-Term Potentiation (LTP):

Following a 10-minute control period (in the presence of the compound orvehicle for control slices), LTP was induced by a 10×TBS. Potentiationof synaptic transmission was then monitored for an additional 60-minuteperiod (in the continuous presence of the compound or vehicle forcontrol slices).

Results

Comparison Between R6/2 and WT Mice.

I/O characteristics were significantly higher in R6/2 mice hippocampalslices when compared to their WT littermates, for the higher stimulationintensities (700 and 800 μA). Paired-pulse properties were in the samerange for R6/2 and WT mice hippocampal slices, except for the 25 msInter-Stimulus Interval, for which facilitation was significantly largerfor R6/2 mice. Long-Term Potentiation was significantly impaired (pvalue<0.0001, Two-way ANOVA) in hippocampal slices of R6/2 mice, whencompared to age-matching WT mice.

Evaluation of 7 nM Compound I-1.

I/O characteristics were not significantly modified after the exposureto 7 nM Compound I-1 in R6/2 hippocampal slices, for all stimulusintensities. Paired-pulse properties were also in the same range beforeand after exposure to 7 nM of Compound I-1 in R6/2 mice hippocampalslices, and did not significantly differ for any of the ISI. Exposure to7 nM Compound I-1 for 15 minutes, did not modify the fEPSP amplitude.

In WT mice hippocampal slices (control conditions), HFS triggered apotentiation of the evoked-response amplitudes that stabilized around45% (fEPSP were increased by 46±5%, at end point). In R6/2 micehippocampal slices (control conditions), HFS triggered a potentiation ofthe evoked-response amplitudes that stabilized around 15% (fEPSP wereincreased by 16±3%, at endpoint). After exposure to 7 nM Compound I-1,HFS triggered a potentiation of the evoked-response amplitudes thatstabilized around 25% (fEPSP were increased by 26±6%, at endpoint). Thepotentiation observed after the exposure to 7 nM Compound I-1 did notsignificantly differ to the one recorded in control R6/2 slices (pvalue=0.0842, Two-way ANOVA). (FIG. 1).

Evaluation of 46 nm Compound I-1.

I/O characteristics were similar before and after the exposure to 46 nMCompound I-1 in R6/2 hippocampal slices, for all stimulus intensities.Paired-pulse properties were not significantly increased after exposureto 46 nM Compound I-1 in R6/2 mice hippocampal slices, for all of theISI. Exposure to 46 nM Compound I-1, for 15 minutes did not modify thefEPSP amplitude in comparison with control slides.

In WT mice hippocampal slices (control conditions), HFS triggered apotentiation of the evoked-response amplitudes that stabilized around45% (fEPSP were increased by 46±5%, at end point). In R6/2 micehippocampal slices (control conditions), HFS triggered a potentiation ofthe evoked-response amplitudes that stabilized around 15% (fEPSP wereincreased by 16±3%, at endpoint). After exposure to 46 nM Compound I-1,HFS triggered a potentiation of the evoked-response amplitudes thatstabilized around 45% (fEPSP were increased by 44±12%, at endpoint). Thepotentiation observed after the exposure to 46 nM Compound I-1 wassignificantly larger than the one recorded in control R6/2 slices (pvalue=0.0065, Two-way ANOVA). (FIG. 2)

Evaluation of 308 nm Compound I-1.

I/O characteristics recorded from R6/2 hippocampal slices were notsignificantly increased after exposure to 308 nM Compound I-1 for allstimulus intensities. Paired-pulse properties were significantly lowerafter exposure to 308 nM Compound I-1 for the 50 ms ISI only, in R6/2mice hippocampal slices. The amplitude of fEPSP was slightly increasedover the 15-minute exposure to 308 nM Compound I-1, when compared to thecontrol R6/2 slides.

In WT mice hippocampal slices (control conditions), HFS triggered apotentiation of the evoked-response amplitudes that stabilized around45% (fEPSP were increased by 46±5%, at end point). In R6/2 micehippocampal slices (control conditions), HFS triggered a potentiation ofthe evoked-response amplitudes that stabilized around 15% (fEPSP wereincreased by 16±3%, at endpoint). After exposure to 308 nM Compound I-1,HFS triggered a potentiation of the evoked-response amplitudes thatstabilized around 35% (fEPSP were increased by 37±9%, at endpoint). Thepotentiation observed after the exposure to 308 nM Compound I-1 wassignificantly larger than the one recorded in control R6/2 slices (pvalue=0.0059, Two-way ANOVA). (FIG. 3)

Conclusions.

Although the highest concentration of Compound I-1 that was investigated(308 nM) slightly increased the amplitude of evoked-responses, none ofthe 3 concentrations displayed a significant effect on the overall I/Ocharacteristics, in R6/2 mice hippocampal slices. None of the evaluatedCompound I-1 concentrations (7 nM, 46 nM or 308 nM) displayed asignificant effect on the short-term plasticity properties, as measuredby paired-pulses with 25 ms to 300 ms ISI (with the exception of 308 nMCompound I-1, which significantly decreased the facilitation of pairedpulses applied with a 50 ms ISI). Whereas 7 nM Compound I-1 failed tosignificantly rescue the LTP impairment recorded in R6/2 micehippocampal slices, this compound completely restored the LTP deficit at46 nM and 308 nM concentrations.

Example 9: Compound-Induced cGMP in Mouse Brain

Objective. To determine the effect of different doses of a compound ofthe invention in cGMP response and compound concentration in differentareas of the mouse brain (cortex, hippocampus, cerebellum and striatum)and compound concentration in blood

Protocol.

Mice (n=7-8 per experimental condition) were dosed PO with vehicle (1%hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, 0.2% Tween80, 0.5% methyl cellulose) or0.3, 1, 3 or 10 mg/Kg of Compound I-1 prepared in vehicle. Thirtyminutes after dosing, under isoflurane anesthesia, the mouse wasdecapitated and the brain was removed and placed into an ice-cold petridish containing slushy dissection solution (saturated with 95% O₂0.5%CO₂). Using an ice-cold spatula, the brain was transferred to mousebrain matrix with coronal spacing for slicing at 1 mm intervals, asshown in FIG. 5 (not to scale, just a scheme).

The sliced brain was transferred back into petri dish containing slushydissection solution with IBMX 0.5 mM (saturated with 95% O₂/5% CO₂). Thedorsal striatum is dissected first, followed by the hippocampus second,followed by the medial prefrontal cortex third, and lastly, thecerebellum fourth. After each region is dissected the dissected tissuewas immediately placed into an eppendorf that was placed on dry ice forthe previous 30 minutes. Small pieces of tissue froze very fast, within10 seconds approximately. After all regions were placed in an eppendorf,the eppendorfs were then snap frozen by immersion into liquid nitrogen.The whole blood sample was collected from the trunk area using mitratips. Tissue samples were stored in the −80° C. and mitra tips at roomtemperature. cGMP and compound levels in brain and blood were determinedby LC/MS; protein quantification of brain samples was determined usingBCA protein assay kit.

Conclusion:

Acute dosing of 10 mg/Kg Compound I-1 P.O. in mice induced a significantincrease of cGMP in all the mouse brain areas analyzed (hippocampus,cerebellum, cortex and striatum). (Tables 9a-d)

TABLE 9a The concentration of cGMP in the mouse hippocampus normalizedto protein concentration in the samples. Hippocampus nM cGMP/μg proteinVehicle 0.3 MPK I-1 1 MPK I-1 3 MPK I-1 10 MPK I-1 0.0353592860.042545857 0.04302025 0.051901286 0.117125** **p < than 0.01 vs.vehicle

TABLE 9b The concentration of cGMP in the mouse striatum normalized toprotein concentration in the samples. STRIATUM nM cGMP/μg proteinVehicle 0.3 MPK I-1 1 MPK I-1 3 MPK I-1 10 MPK I-1 0.021855750.022608143 0.031235625 0.037185875 0.046120125* *p < than 0.05 vs.vehicle;

TABLE 9c The concentration of cGMP in the mouse cerebellum normalized toprotein concentration in the samples. CEREBELLUM nM cGMP/μg proteinvehicle 0.3 MPK I-1 1 MPK I-1 3 MPK I-1 10 MPK I-1 0.4731194290.319919286 0.457655 0.75244675 1.7957685**** ****p < or = to 0.0001 vs.vehicle;

TABLE 9d The concentration of cGMP in the mouse cortex normalized toprotein concentration in the samples. CORTEX nM cGMP/μg protein vehicle0.3 MPK I-1 1 MPK I-1 3 MPK I-1 10 MPK I-1 0.06765825 0.0776117140.08063575 0.10810275 0.173364125* *p < than 0.05 vs. vehicle;

Example 10. Novel Object Recognition (NOR) Test

Objective.

To assess the efficacy of compounds of the invention in reversing memorydisruption induced by MK-801 using the Novel Object Recognition (NOR)test in male Long Evans rats. The NOR is a test of recognition learningand memory retrieval, which takes advantage of the spontaneouspreference of rodents to investigate a novel object compared with afamiliar one (Ennaceur and Delacour, 1988). Studies indicated that theNOR procedure involves several brain regions, including perirhinalcortex (Ennaceur et al. 1996, 1997 and Aggleton et al. 1997) and thehippocampus (Wood et al. 1993 and Clark et al. 2000). The NOR test hasbeen employed extensively to assess the potential cognitive-enhancingproperties of novel test compounds. Because the NOR paradigm does notinvolve reward or noxious stimuli, it provides less confoundingvariables when being translated into analogous tests conducted in humanclinical trials. In the present study, a memory saving model was used totest the novel compound—MK-801 (Dizocilpine), an uncompetitiveantagonist of the NMDA receptor was used to cause deficit of recognitionmemory. Compounds of the invention were evaluated through its efficacyin reversing memory impairment.

Material and Methods.

Animals.

Adult male Long-Evans rats (275-299 gram at arrival from Envigo,Indianapolis, Ind.) were used in this study. Rats were placed in theexperimental rooms and assigned unique identification numbers (tailmarks). Rats were housed 2 per cage in polycarbonate cages with filtertops and acclimated for at least 7 days prior to testing. Animal roomwas maintained in a 12/12 h light/dark cycle (lights on at 07.00 EST),22±1° C. and relative humidity at approximately 50%. Food and water wereprovided ad libitum. All animals were examined, handled and weighedprior to the study to assure adequate health and to minimize thenon-specific stress associated with testing. Each animal was randomlyassigned across the treatment groups. The experiments were conductedduring the animal's light cycle phase.

Test compounds.

The following compounds were used in this study:

MK-801 (0.1 mg/kg; Sigma-Aldrich) was dissolved in saline and injectedIP 15 min prior to NOR training.

Galantamine (1 mg/kg; Tocris) was dissolved in saline and injected IP 15minutes prior to training.

Compound I-1 (0.01, 0.1, and 1 mg/kg) was oral administrated 60 minutesprior to training. The dose volume was 4 ml/kg

Experimental Procedures.

NOR test was conducted in an open-field arena (40×40 cm) placed in asound-attenuated room under dimmed lighting. Each rat was testedseparately and care was taken to remove olfactory/taste cues by cleaningthe arena and test objects with 70% alcohol between trials and rats. Alltraining and testing trials were video-taped and scored by an observerblind to treatments.

On Days 1 and 2, rats were allowed to freely explore the arena (noobjects inside) for a 5-minute habituation period. On Day 3 (trainingand testing day), rats were administered vehicle (saline), galantamineor compound solutions followed by MK-801 or vehicle (saline). After thepretreatment time, each animal was placed into the test arena in thepresence of two identical objects. Each rat was placed in the arenafacing the same direction at the same position, and the time spentactively exploring the objects during a 3-minute training period (T1)was recorded. The rat was returned to its home cage following training.NOR test (T2) was conducted 1 hours after T1. Each rat was placed backinto the test arena in the presence of one familiar object and one novelobject for 5 minutes, and the time spent exploring both objects wasrecorded during 0-1, 0-3 and 0-5 min time ranges. The presentation orderand position of the objects (left/right) in T2 was randomized betweenrats to prevent bias from order or place preference.

Statistical Analysis.

Data of NOR test (T2) were expressed as Recognition Index, which isdefined as the ratio of the time spent exploring the novel object overthe total time spent exploring both objects(Novel/(Familiar+Novel)×100%) during the test session. Data wereanalyzed by using one-way ANOVA followed by Fisher's LSD post hoc teston 0-1, 0-3 and 0-5 minute time range separately, with significance setat P<0.05. Animals with overall object exploration time less than 10seconds in the 5 min test session were eliminated; rats with recognitionindex above 90% or below 30% were also eliminated because they suggeststrong (non-memory) bias between two objects. And then statisticaloutliers that fell above or below two standard deviations from the meanwere removed from the final analysis. With these criteria, 1-3 rats wereeliminated from each experimental group (N=15-16) and were excluded fromstatistical analyses for all time range (0-1, 0-3, and 0-5 minute).

Results.

None of the rats in this study showed obvious side effects at any dose.Rats maintained normal vigilance, activity and exploration level toobjects. ANOVA showed significant main treatment effects on RecognitionIndex during 0-1 min time range [F(8,121)=2.451, P<0.05]. Post hoc testshowed that MK-801 0.1 mg/kg caused a strong memory deficit, with aRecognition Index approaching chance level (50%). Galantamine (1 mg/kg)and Compound I-1 at 1 mg/kg significantly reversed MK-801-induced memorydeficits (Ps<0.01 and Ps<0.05, respectively, compared to Vehicle/MK-801group). During 0-3 minute time range (Table 10), ANOVA found asignificant main treatment effect [F(8,121)=3.404, P<0.01]. Post hoctest showed that MK-801 0.1 mg/kg caused a strong memory deficit, with aRecognition Index approaching chance level (50%). Galantamine (1 mg/kg)and Compound I-1 at 0.1 and 1 mg/kg significantly reversedMK-801-induced memory deficits (Ps<0.001, Ps<0.01 and P<0.05,respectively, compared to Vehicle/MK-801 group). Similarly, ANOVA showeda significant main treatment effect during 0-5 minute time range[F(8,121)=3.179, P<0.01]. Post hoc test showed that MK-801 at 0.1 mg/kgcaused a strong memory deficit, with a Recognition Index approachingchance level (50%). Galantamine (1 mg/kg), and Compound I-1 at 1 mg/kgsignificantly reversed MK-801-induced memory deficits (P<0.001, P<0.01and Ps<0.05, respectively, compared to Vehicle/MK-801 group).

TABLE 10 Summary of Recognition Index Measurements (0 to 3 minute timebin) Standard Error Statistical Standard of the Analysis Treatmentn-number Mean Deviation Mean (p-value) Vehicle + 13 72.4 6.8 1.9 <0.001Saline Control Vehicle + 12 54.1 7.8 2.3 NA MK-801 Galantamine + 14 66.29.3 2.5 0.002 MK-801 I-1 (0.1 mg/kg) + 13 60.1 10.0 2.8 0.133 MK-801 I-1(1 mg/kg) + 16 64.8 12.0 3.0 0.005 MK-801 I-1 (10 mg/kg) + 15 66.8 9.52.5 0.001 MK-801Statistical comparisons are made to the “Vehicle+MK-801” treatmentgroup. Statistical significance is deemed when p value is less than0.005.

Summary.

Reference compound galantamine 1 mg/kg significantly reversed thecognitive deficit induced by MK-801 0.1 mg/kg, suggesting the validityof the test. Compound I-1 at 0.1 mg/kg and 1 mg/kg showed clear efficacyin saving the NOR memory after treatment of MK-801, suggesting thecompound possesses properties of memory enhancement.

Example 11—Brain Activation in Rats as Measured by fMRI-BOLD

Objective.

Functional magnetic resonance imaging or functional MRI (fMRI) is afunctional neuroimaging procedure using MRI technology that measuresbrain activity by detecting changes associated with blood flow. Thistechnique relies on the fact that cerebral blood flow and neuronalactivation are coupled. When an area of the brain is in use, blood flowto that region also increases. Awake rats were studied by fMRI to assesschanges (“fingerprint”) in brain activity following a single intravenousadministration of a compound of the invention

Experimental Design.

24 male Sprague-Dawley rats weighing from 275-350 g were used. Followingacclimation, the animals were placed in the restrainer and positioned inthe magnet. Catheters were placed in each animal to allow for remotedosing when the animals were in the magnet. Scans were acquiredcontinuously for 5 minutes prior to administration of either a vehicleor a compound of the invention to establish a baseline for the brainactivity. Following the 5-minute baseline period, either the vehicle orthe compound of the invention was administered to the rat and scans wereacquired continuously for 30-45 minutes.

Study Design.

Group No. N Treatment Dose (mg/kg) ROA Imaging 1 10 Vehicle — IV @Images were 2 10 I-1 Defined by EC₅₀ EC₅₀ acquired 3 10 Non-CNS Definedby continuously penetrant target BP starting 5 min sGC response priorcompound to dosing and for 30 minutes post-dosing

Summary.

As shown in FIG. 4, a greater region of the brain is activated when theanimal is administered a compound of the invention (Compound I-1) (FIG.4, right) then when the animal is dosed with a sGC stimulator that isperipherally restricted (i.e., a compound that does not enter the CNS)(FIG. 4, left). Specifically, when dosed with a compound of theinvention, brain regions associated with memory (cortical transitionareas, thalamus, and ventral hippocampus), and arousal (the reticularactivating system) were activated.

Example 12—pCREB Phosphorylation in Rat Primary Neurons

Objective.

To assess the ability of Compound I-1 to activate cAMP responseelement-binding protein (CREB) in rat primary neurons. CREB is acellular transcription factor. It binds to DNA sequences called cAMPresponse elements (CRE), and regulates transcription of the downstreamgenes (See Bourtchuladze R, et al., Cell 1994; 79 (1): 59-68). CREB hasa well-documented role in neuronal plasticity and long-term memoryformation in the brain and has been shown to be integral in theformation of spatial memory (See Silva A J, et al., Annual Review ofNeuroscience 1998; 21: 127-148). CREB proteins are activated byphosphorylation of Serine 133 by various kinases, includingcAMP-dependent protein kinase or Protein Kinase A (PKA), cGMP-dependentprotein kinase or Protein Kinase G (PKG), and Ca2+/calmodulin-dependentprotein kinases. (See Shaywitz A J and Greenberg M E, Annual Review ofBiochemistry 1999; 68 (1): 821-861 and Wong J C, et al., J Cell Biochem2012: 113(11):3587-98). Stimulation of CREB could have therapeuticbenefits for diseases in which cognition, neuronal plasticity, and orneuronal function is impaired.

Materials and Methods.

Compounds.

Compound I-1 was dissolved in DMSO as a 10 mM solution and stored at−20° C. To achieve desired test concentrations, stock concentrationswere serially diluted into DMSO and then diluted to the appropriateconcentration in assay buffer.

Rat Primary Neurons Culture.

Neurons were isolated from Sprague Dawley rat embryos on embryonic day18 (E18). Approximately 10 embryos were obtained from each rat, andwhole brains were isolated from the embryos. Hippocampus and cortex weredissected from the brains under a stereoscopic microscope using twopairs of fine tweezers. The meninges were carefully removed. Afterdissection, the tissues were chopped and washed gently once with 10 mLof Ca²⁺ and Mg²⁺ free Hank's solution (HBSS, Corning cat #21-022-CM) ina 15-mL conical tube. After washing, 5 mL of a solution of 0.25% trypsin(Invitrogen cat #15090-046) and 0.1% deoxyribonuclease I (DNase I, Sigmacat #DN-25) were added to the tissues in the tube, which were thenincubated at 37° C. for 15 min. After incubation and digestion with theenzymes, tissues were washed three times with ice-cold HBSS. Afterwashing, 3 mL of a solution of 0.1% of DNase I was added to the tube andthe tissues were slowly pipetted using a glass Pasteur pipette 12 times,and then centrifuged at 500×g for 10 min. The cell pellet wasresuspended in the culture medium (Neurobasal medium, Gibco cat#21103-049), 2% of B27 supplement (Gibco Cat #17504-044), 0.5 mML-glutamine (Corning cat #25-005-Cl), 25 aM L-glutamic acid (Sigma cat#G1251) and 1% penicillin/streptomycin (Gibco cat #15070-063)).Subsequently, the cell suspension was plated into poly-L-lysine coated96-well plates at 100,000 cells/well. Twenty-four h after plating, halfof the culture medium was removed and replaced with culture medium asdescribed above but without glutamic acid. Cells were maintained in a37° C. humidified incubator with 5% CO₂ and used between days 6-10.

Assay Conditions.

For each test concentration, Compound I-1 was diluted in 100% DMSO to100-fold of its final assay concentration. Immediately prior to theassay, Compound I-1 was diluted 10-fold into HBSS (containing calciumand magnesium) (10× the final assay concentration) containing 100 aMDETA-NONOate (10× the final assay concentration). Medium was removed andcells were washed once with 90 μL HBSS (Corning cat #21-023-CV). Cellswere then incubated with 90 μL HBSS for 30 min at 37° C. 10 μL from thetest article/HBSS/DETA-NONOate plate was added to the cells, which wereincubated for additional 30 min at 37° C. Final DMSO concentrations were1%, final DETA-NONOate concentration was 10 aM; and final Compound I-1concentrations were 10,000 nM, 1000 nM, 100 nM, 10 nM, 1 nM, 0.1 nM,0.01 nM, and 0.0 nM. Medium was removed and cell were lysed and assaywas performed according to Cisbio protocol (phospho-CREB (Ser133)catalog #64CREPEG) and the plate was read using Envision instrument(PerkinElmer).

Data Analysis.

Data were analyzed with a 4-parameter fit (log(agonist) vs.response-variable slope) using GraphPad Prism Software v.7. The EC₅₀ wasinterpolated from the curve fit and is defined as the concentration atwhich Compound I-1 elicits 50% of its maximal response.

Results.

Phosphorylation of CREB at Ser133 stimulated by Compound I-1 wasconcentration-dependent, with an EC₅₀ of 3.0 nM. The 95% confidenceinterval ranged from 0.5 nM to 17.8 nM.

Example 13-Evaluation of Compounds of the Invention in Pain Models andTests

Objective.

To evaluate the efficacy of compounds of the invention in acute andtonic pain, inflammatory pain, post-operative pain, and visceral pain.

Materials and Methods: Acute and Tonic Pain

Paw Pressure Test.

Static mechanical hyperalgesia is measured. This test requires theapplication of an increasing pressure on the hind paws between a flatsurface and a blunt pointer. To evaluate the analgesic action of acompound, one hind paw of the animal was inflamed by an injection orinjured by ligation, while the other hind paw was not injured orinflamed. The apparatus exerted a steadily increasing force on the hindpaws. The reaction threshold was determined as the pressure (g) requiredto elicit paw withdrawal and/or vocalization. The animals were gentlyhandled by the experimenter and static mechanical hyperalgesia wereassessed two times for both hind paws.

Tail Flick Test.

A radiant heat was applied on the tail. When the rat felt discomfort, itreacted by a sudden tail movement (tail flick) which automaticallystopped the stimulation and the timer for the measurement by the animalreaction time or nociceptive reaction latency (period from the beginningof the stimulation until detection of the response of the animal). Acut-off was previously fixed at 10 sec in order to prevent tissuedamage.

Acetic Acid Test.

Abdominal contraction was induced by intraperitoneal injection of 0.6%acetic acid solution in rats (10 mL/kg). The number of writhing (atwisting or contorting of the body due to pain) was recorded from the5^(th) to the 15^(th) minute after injection.

Formalin Test.

2.5% formalin solution was injected by subplantar route into the righthind paw. Scoring of pain behavior was performed in rats for 36 minutesevery 3 minutes according to the following scores:

0=normal behavior of the injected hind limb to support the body

1=slight touching of the injected paw on the floor to lightly support ornot support the body

2=total withdrawal of the injected paw

3=licking, biting or shaking of the injected paw

Materials and Methods: Inflammatory Pain

Carrageenan.

Induction: Three hours before assessment of the nociceptive thresholdusing the paw pressure test 100 μL of a 2% carrageenan suspension wasinjected into the plantar aspect of the right hind paw. The Paw Pressuretest was then conducted as described above.

Kaolin.

Induction: In rats, unilateral arthritis was induced by anintra-articular injection of a 10% kaolin suspension into the knee jointof the right hind paw under gas anesthesia (3.5% isoflurane/3 L/min).Gait score: The gait score will be evaluated 3 h 30 min after kaolinadministration by:

0: normal gait

1: mid disability

2: intermittent raising of the paw

3: elevated paw

Materials and Methods. Post-Operative Pain: Brennan Model.

Surgery: Surgery was done under gas anesthesia (2.5% isoflurane/3L/min). For all rats, the plantar aspect of the left hind paw wasexposed and a 1 cm longitudinal incision was made using a surgicalblade, through the skin and fascia of the plantar aspect of the foot,starting 0.5 cm from the proximal edge of the heel and extending towardthe toes. The plantaris muscle was elevated and incised longitudinallywhereas the insertions remained intact. After hemostasis with gentlepressure, the skin was stitched up with two sutures. After surgery,animals recovered in their cages.

Electronic Von Frey Test: Tactile allodynia was assessed using theelectronic Von Frey test 24 h after surgery. The test requires theapplication of an increasing pressure onto the plantar aspect of thehind paws. The apparatus exerted a steady force on the hind paws.Reaction thresholds were determined as the pressure (g) required toelicit paw withdrawal. Each reaction threshold measurement was repeatedthree times for both hind paws with intervals of approximately 2 to 3mins.

The results for acute and tonic pain, inflammatory pain, andpost-operative pain models and test for animals treated with 10 mg/kg ofCompound I-1 PO were significant and are presented below.

Results.

Compound I-1, Internal Reference p.o., 10 mg/kg % of % of activity vs.activity vs. Pain Model Model-test vehicle Reference ID vehicle Acuteand Healthy rats-  −6% Morphine 4  69% Tonic Pain paw pressure mg/kgs.c. test Healthy rats-   25% Morphine 4  66% tail mg/kg s.c. flick testAcetic acid    7% (-) U50, 488 H 100% test- 3 mg/kg s.c. Abdominalcramps Formalin   57% Morphine 4  57% test- mg/kg s.c. Score (earlyphase) Formalin   32% Morphine 4  38% test- mg/kg s.c. Score (latephase) Inflammatory Carrageenan-   38% Indomethacin 100% Pain pawpressure 30 test mg/kg p.o. Kaolin-gait   40% Indomethacin  58% score 30mg/kg p.o. Post- Brennan   31% Morphine 4  88% operative model- mg/kgs.c. Pain Electronic Von Frey testTesting: 120 minutes after treatment. N=4/model/test. Results areexpressed for each group as a percentage of activity calculated from themean value of the vehicle-treated animals and compared to naïve animals,control paw, or cut-off value, depending on the test.

Conclusions.

Compound I-1 demonstrated effects in the formalin test for acute pain.Compound I-1 demonstrated effects in the carrageenan and kaolin modelsof inflammatory pain. Compound I-1 demonstrated effects in the test forpost-operative pain.

Example 14. Antihyperalgesic Effects of Single and RepeatedAdministrations of Compound I—in a Rat Model of Diabetic Neuropathy (STZModel)

Objective. To assess the antihyperalgesic effects of single and repeatedadministrations of a compound of the invention in a model of diabeticneuropathy (streptozotocin model) using the paw pressure test in rats.Gabapentin will be used as internal comparator. Morphine HCl will beused as a reference substance to validate the assay.

In humans, one of the leading causes of neuropathic pain is diabeticneuropathy. Several diabetic animal models are available but the mostcommonly used for the study of pain is the streptozotocin model. In thisexperimental model, neuropathy is reproduced in rats using a singleintraperitoneal injection of streptozotocin which induces diabetes andconsequently hyperalgesia and allodynia (See Rakieten N et al., CancerChemother, 1963(Rep.29):91). Seven days later (D7), diabetic animalspresent a significant increase in glycemia associated with weight loss,polydipsia and polyuria. Animals develop a mechanical hyperalgesia whichcan be measured after Day 18 using a mechanical nociceptive stimulation(paw pressure test) (See Randall L O and Selitto J J, Arch IntPharmacodyn, 1957(111):409-419).

Materials

Animals.

Seventy (70) male Sprague-Dawley rats (SPF status, Janvier, France),weighing 210-300 g the day of diabetes induction were used. Rats werehoused in a temperature (20-24° C.) and relative humidity (45%-65%)controlled room and acclimated to an artificial day/night cycle of 12hours light (6.30 a.m. to 6.30 p.m.)/12 hours darkness. Rats had freeaccess to tap water and were fed ad libitum with pelleted complete diet(reference A04, S.A.F.E.). Animals were housed 3 per cage (cages Type E)and were acclimated for a period of at least 5 days before any testing.Each rat was identified by tail markings. Based on the SPF status of theanimal facilities, there was no reason to expect that contaminants werepresent in the food, water or bedding, at levels capable of interferingwith the results of the tests.

Reagents.

Streptozotocin (STZ, Sigma-Aldrich) was extemporaneously prepared as asolution in Citrate (Citric acid trisodium salt, Sigma-Aldrich) buffer 1mM pH 4-4.5 (in water for injection). 0.9% NaCl was used as vehicle forGabapentin (Zhejiang Excel pharma Co. Ltd.), Morphine HCl (Francopia)and Compound I-1. Insulin (Sanofi-Aventis) was prepared at 10 UI/ml in0.9% NaCl

Equipment.

Accu-Chek© (Roche Diagnostics S.A., France) and Accu-Chek® tests strips(Roche Diagnostics S.A., France) was used to measure the glycemia. UgoBasile Analgesimeter (Ugo Basile, Italy) will be used for the pawpressure test.

Data Processing.

SigmaStat software version 3.5 (SPSS Science Software, Erkrath, Germany)Lab X direct software version 2.4 (Mettler Toledo, France)

Methods.

Pain Test.

Static mechanical hyperalgesia was assessed using the Paw Pressure testor Randall & Selitto test (See Randall L O and Selitto J J, Arch IntPharmacodyn, 1957(111):409-419, the teaching of which are incorporatedherein by reference). This test requires the application of anincreasing pressure on the hind paws between a flat surface and a bluntpointer. This test is usually used with animals with one hind pawinflamed by an injection or injured by ligation, and one normal hindpaw,to evaluate compounds for analgesic action. The apparatus exerts asteadily increasing force and reaction threshold is determined as thepressure (g) required to elicit paw withdrawal and/or vocalization. Inthe experiment, animals were gently handled by the experimenter andstatic mechanical hyperalgesia will be assessed. Each reaction thresholdwas measured for both hind paws.

Experimental Design. Seven experimental groups of 10 rats each will beused:

Group 1: Sham animals (Citrate buffer)/Vehicle, p.o., solution, dailyfrom Day 18 to Day 21 (D18 to D21)

Group 2: STZ (75 mg/kg, i.p.)/Vehicle, p.o., solution, daily from D18 toD21

Group 3: STZ (75 mg/kg, i.p.)/Compound I-1 (1 mg/kg, p.o.), solution,daily from D18 to D21

Group 4: STZ (75 mg/kg, i.p.)/Compound I-1 (3 mg/kg, p.o.), solution,daily from D18 to D21

Group 5: STZ (75 mg/kg, i.p.)/Compound I-1 (10 mg/kg, p.o.), solution,daily from D18 to D21

Group 6: STZ (75 mg/kg, i.p.)/Gabapentin (100 mg/kg, p.o.) in 0.9% NaCl,solution, acute on testing days (D18 and D21)

Group 7: STZ (75 mg/kg, i.p.)/Morphine (4 mg/kg, s.c.) in 0.9% NaCl,solution, acute on testing days (D18 and D21)

Vehicle, Compound I-1 were orally administered at 5 ml/kg. Gabapentinwas orally administered at 10 ml/kg. Morphine HCl was subcutaneouslyadministered (5 ml/kg). Doses are expressed in terms of free activesubstance. Dosing and testing were performed in a random order by ablinded experimenter except for the Sham and the Morphine-treatedgroups.

Procedure.

Induction.

Chronic peripheral neuropathy was induced by a single intraperitonealinjection of Streptozotocin (75 mg/kg, i.p.) on D0. Six experimentalgroups were treated with streptozotocin and one will be treated withCitrate buffer 1 mM (vehicle of streptozotocin) after Glycemiameasurement. On D7, glycemia was measured and rats having level>250mg/dl were treated subcutaneously with Insulin (Lantus®, 2 IU/rat),three times a week with injections every two days from D7-8 to D14, onD18 at the end of the day and on D20 to prevent excessive cachexia. OnD7, animals with a glycemia<250 mg/dl were treated again withStreptozotocin (75 mg/kg, i.p.). Glycemia was measured on D14 and ratshaving level>250 mg/dl were treated subcutaneously with Insulin(Lantus®, 2 IU/rat), three times a week with injections every two daysfrom D14 to D19.

Behavioral Testing.

STZ animals are selected (baseline) on D18 and tested (animal dosing andbehavioral test) on D18 and D21. The time course was as follows:

On Day 0 (D0), glycemia was measured before diabetes induction byinjection of streptozotocin (75 mg/kg, i.p.) to select animals meetingthe inclusion criteria (glycemia<150 mg/dl).

On D7 and on D18, glycemia was measured in to select animals with aglycemia higher than 250 mg/dl (except for the Group #1 sham animals).

On D18, nociceptive reaction thresholds (vocalization or paw withdrawal)was measured in all groups in order to select diabetic animals meetingthe inclusion criteria: 20 g<paw withdrawal threshold<240 g. Shamanimals with a paw withdrawal threshold included between 280 g and 520 gfor both hind paws were selected. Animals having a body weight<200 gor >400 g were excluded from the study.

On D18 vehicle, Compound I-1, gabapentin and morphine will be given(T0). The antihyperalgesic effect of the vehicle, Compound I-1,gabapentin and morphine were evaluated on both hind paws using the Pawpressure test 60, 120, 180, and 240 min post drug administration.Morphine-treated animals were also tested 30 min after administration,but these data were not used as morphine showed significantantihyperalgesic effects 60 min after treatment.

Rats from groups 1 to 5 received a daily treatment on D19, D20 and D21.

On D21, glycemia and nociceptive thresholds were measured before thedaily treatment in all groups. Vehicle, Compound I-1 gabapentin andmorphine were given (T0). The antihyperalgesic effect of the morphinewas evaluated 30 min post administration using the Paw pressure test and120 min post vehicle, Compound I-1, gabapentin and morphineadministration.

Data Presentation and Statistical analysis. Results are expressed as:

The paw withdrawal threshold (mean±s.e.m.) in grams of contact pressurefor each group, calculated from individual paw withdrawal thresholds.The percentage of variation of the paw withdrawal threshold calculatedfrom the mean value of the vehicle-treated group.

To determine a statistical effect of the test substance(s) and thereference substance, data was analyzed by a parametrical ornon-parametrical test depending on the normal distribution of theresults. The significance level is indicted below.

Results.

On D18, at 0 minutes all the groups treated with STZ had hyperalgesiawith nociceptive threshold around 200 g as compared to normal rats withnociceptive threshold approximately 350 g. At 60 min followingadministration of the substance (i.e., vehicle, Compound I-1 at 1, 3, or10 mg/kg, gabapentin, or morphine), the nociceptive threshold forgabapentin (272±6.6, p<0.01), morphine (420±35 p<0.001) and Compound I-1at 10 mg/kg (328±32.6 p<0.001) were statistically differentdemonstrating efficacy as compared to the vehicle-only treated group.Similarly, at 120 min, the nociceptive threshold for gabapentin(302±17.7, p<0.001), morphine (317±27.6 p<0.001) and Compound I-1 at 10mg/kg (387±30.2 p<0.001) were statistically different and efficacious ascompared to the vehicle-only treated group. By 180 min, only thenociceptive threshold for Compound I-1 at 10 mg/kg (319±23.1 p<0.001)was efficacious and statistically different as compared to thevehicle-only treated group. By 240 minutes post-administration, no groupwas statistically significant from the vehicle. On D21, at baselineprior to the administration of the substance, only the nociceptivethreshold for Compound I-1 at 10 mg/kg (259±25.6 p<0.01) wasstatistically different as compared to the vehicle-only treated groupindicating anti-hyperalgesic efficacy was still present at Cmin. By 120min, after dosing at D21, the nociceptive threshold for gabapentin(274±19.2, p<0.01), morphine (283±16.7 p<0.001) and Compound I-1 at 10mg/kg (346±20.5 p<0.001) were statistically different and efficacious ascompared to the vehicle-only treated group.

Conclusion.

Compound I-1 demonstrated an anti-hyperalgesic response when tested at10 mg/kg in the STZ model of diabetic neuropathy. The effect in pain wasobserved acutely for up to 3 hours at levels at least comparable tomorphine or gabapentin. After 3-days of dosing compound I-1 demonstratedefficacy in pain when tested at Cmin indicating a long-term effect.Also, when tested after 4-days of dosing, compound I-1 maintained itsefficacy in the STZ model of neuropathic pain.

Various embodiments of the invention can be described in the text below.As explained supra, it is to be understood that pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts are included in these embodiments, even though thephrase “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” is not written.

[1]. A compound of Formula I.

[2]. A compound of [1] above, or according to other embodiments of theinvention, wherein W is a ring B and the compound is one of Formula IIB.

[3]. A compound of [1] or [2] above, or according to other embodimentsof the invention, wherein n is an integer selected from 1 or 2 and eachJ^(B) is independently selected from halogen, a C₁₋₄ alkyl, —OR^(B) or—OR^(B1).

[4]. A compound of [1], [2] or [3] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein n is 1.

[5]. A compound of [1], [2] or [3] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein n is 2.

[6]. A compound of [1], [2], [3], [4] or [5] above, or according toother embodiments of the invention, wherein each J^(B) is independentlyselected from halogen atoms.

[7]. A compound of [1], [2], [3], [4], [5] or [6] above, or according toother embodiments of the invention, wherein each J^(B) is independentlyselected from fluoro or chloro.

[8]. A compound of [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6] or [7] above, oraccording to other embodiments of the invention, wherein each J^(B) isfluoro.

[9]. A compound of [1], [2], [3], [4] or [5] above, or according toother embodiments of the invention, wherein each J^(B) is a C₁₋₄ alkyl.

[10]. A compound of [1], [2], [3], [4], [5] or [9] above, or accordingto other embodiments of the invention, wherein each J^(B) is selectedfrom ethyl or methyl.

[11]. A compound of [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [9] or [10] above, oraccording to other embodiments of the invention, wherein each J^(B) ismethyl.

[12]. A compound of [1], [2], [3], [5], [6] or [7] above, or accordingto other embodiments of the invention, wherein one J^(B) is fluoro andthe other J^(B) is chloro.

[13]. A compound of [1] or [2] above, or according to other embodimentsof the invention, wherein n is 0.

[14]. A compound of any one of [1] to [13] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein ring B is phenyl.

[15]. A compound of [1] to [3], [6] to [12], or [14] above, or accordingto other embodiments of the invention, wherein n is 1 or 2.

[16]. A compound of [1] to [12], [14] or [15] above, or according toother embodiments of the invention, wherein a J^(B) is ortho to theattachment of the methylene linker between ring B and the core of themolecule, and the J^(B) is halogen.

[17]. A compound of [1] to [13], [15] or [16] above, or according toother embodiments of the invention, wherein ring B is a 6-memberedheteroaryl ring.

[18]. A compound of [1] to [13], or [15] to [17] above, or according toother embodiments of the invention, wherein ring B is a pyridyl ring.

[19]. A compound of [1] to [13], or [15] to [17] above, or according toother embodiments of the invention, wherein ring B is a pyrimidinylring.

[20]. A compound of [1] above, or according to other embodiments of theinvention, wherein W is absent and the compound is one of Formula IIA.

[21]. A compound of [1] or [20] above, or according to other embodimentsof the invention, wherein J^(B) is a C₁₋₄ alkyl chain, optionallysubstituted by up to 5 instances of fluorine.

[22]. A compound of [1], [20] or [21] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein J^(B) is a C₁₋₂ alkyl chain,optionally substituted by up to 5 instances of fluorine.

[23]. A compound of [1], [20], [21] or [22] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein J^(B) is an ethyl chain,optionally substituted by 3 instances of fluorine.

[24]. A compound of [1], [20], [21] or [22] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein J^(B) is an ethyl chain,optionally substituted by 5 instances of fluorine.

[25]. A compound of any one of [1] to [24] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein G, Z and Q are each N.

[26]. A compound of [1] to [19], or [25] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein the compound is one of FormulaIII, or any of its tautomers thereof.

[27]. A compound of any one of [1] to [26] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein R¹¹ is H, NR^(a2)R^(b2),—C(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)R^(15a), —SO₂R^(b2), —SR^(b2), halo, —OCF₃,—CN, hydroxyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl optionally and independently substitutedwith 0-2 occurrences of R^(b2), C₂₋₆ alkynyl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-2 occurrences of R^(b2), C₁₋₆ alkyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-5 occurrences of R¹⁵,C₁₋₆ alkoxy optionally and independently substituted with 0-3occurrences of R¹⁵, phenyl optionally and independently substituted with0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵ or3-8 membered heterocyclyl optionally and independently substituted with0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵.[28]. A compound of any one of [1] to [27] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein R¹¹ is H or C₁₋₆ alkyl optionallyand independently substituted with 0-5 occurrences of R¹⁵.[29]. A compound of any one of [1] to [28] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein R¹¹ is C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-5 occurrences of R¹⁵.[30]. A compound of any one of [1] to [29] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein R¹¹ is methyl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵.[31]. A compound of any one of [1] to [30] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein R¹⁵ is halo in each instance.[32]. A compound of any one of [1] to [31] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein R¹⁵ is fluoro in each instance.[33]. A compound of any one of [1] to [30] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein R¹¹ is unsubstituted methyl.[34]. A compound of any one of [1] to [32] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein R¹¹ is methyl substituted with 2occurrences of R¹⁵.[35]. A compound of any one of [1] to [32], or [34] above, or accordingto other embodiments of the invention, wherein R¹¹ is —CF₂H.[36]. A compound of any one of [1] to [32] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein R¹¹ is methyl independentlysubstituted with 3 occurrences of R¹⁵.[37]. A compound of any one of [1] to [32], or [36] above, or accordingto other embodiments of the invention, wherein R¹¹ is —CF₃.[38]. A compound of any one of [1] to [29] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein R¹¹ is ethyl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-5 occurrences of R¹⁵.[39]. A compound of any one of [1] to [38] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein q is 0.[40]. A compound of any one of [1] to [39] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein the core formed by rings E and Ais selected from:

wherein the C atom with a symbol * represents the attachment point tothe ring containing G, Z, and Q; and the C atom with a symbol **represents the point of attachment of the 2 instances of J.[41]. A compound of any one of [1] to [40] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein the core formed by rings E and Ais selected from:

[42]. A compound of any one of [1] to [41] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein each instance of J^(C) ishydrogen.[43]. A compound of any one of [1] to [42] above, or according to otherembodiments of the invention, wherein the compound is selected fromthose listed in Table I.[44]. A pharmaceutical composition comprising at least onepharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier and a compound of anyone of [1] to [42] above, or according to other embodiments of theinvention.[45]. A method for treating a disease, health condition or disorderselected from a CNS disease, health condition or disorder, the methodcomprising administering to a subject in need of treatment atherapeutically effective amount of a compound of any of [1] to [43]above, or a pharmaceutical composition of [44] above, or according toother embodiments of the invention, wherein the disease, healthcondition or disorder is selected from:

-   -   Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS or Lou        Gehrig's disease), Down syndrome, dementia, vascular dementia,        mixed dementia, vascular cognitive impairment, Binswanger's        dementia (subcortical arteriosclerotic encephalopathy), Cerebral        Autosomal-Dominant Arteriopathy with Subcortical Infarcts and        Leukoencephalopathy (CADASIL or CADASIL syndrome),        frontotemporal lobar degeneration or dementia, HIV-associated        dementia (including asymptomatic neurocognitive impairment        (ANI), minor neurocognitive disorder (MND), and HIV-associated        dementia (HAD) (also called AIDS dementia complex [ADC] or HIV        encephalopathy), Lewy body dementia, pre-senile dementia (mild        cognitive impairment, MCI), glaucoma, Huntington's diseases (or        chorea, HD), or a cognitive defect associated with HD; multiple        sclerosis (MS), multiple system atrophy (MSA), Parkinson's        disease, Parkinsonism Plus, spinocerebellar ataxias,        Steel-Richardson-Olszewski disease (progressive supranuclear        palsy), attention deficit disorder (ADD) and attention deficit        hyperactivity disorder (ADHD);    -   neuropathic pain;    -   a psychiatric, mental, mood or affective disorder selected from        a bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, general psychosis,        drug-induced psychosis, a delusional disorder, schizoaffective        disorder, obsessive compulsive disorder (OCD), a depressive        disorder, an anxiety disorder, a panic disorder, or        post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD);    -   traumatic (closed or open, penetrating head injuries, including        concussion and CTE) or non-traumatic (stroke (in particular,        ischemic stroke), aneurism, hypoxia) injury to the brain or        cognitive impairment or dysfunction resulting from brain        injuries or neurodegenerative disorders;    -   dystonias, including generalized, focal, segmental, sexual,        intermediate, acute dystonic reaction, and genetic/primary        dystonia; and dyskinesias, including acute, chronic/tardive, and        non-motor and levo-dopa induced dyskinesia (LID);    -   disorders characterized by a relative reduction in synaptic        plasticity and synaptic processes including, Fragile X, Rhett's        disorder, Williams syndrome, Renpenning's syndrome, autism        spectrum disorders, including autism, Asperger's syndrome,        pervasive development disorder and childhood disintegrative        disorder;    -   chemo brain, levo-dopa induced addictive behavior, alcoholism,        narcotic dependence (including to amphetamine, opiates or other        substances) and substance abuse.        [46]. A method according to [45] above, or according to other        embodiments of the invention, wherein the disease, health        condition or disorder is selected from Alzheimer's disease,        amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS or Lou Gehrig's disease),        Down syndrome, dementia, vascular dementia, mixed dementia,        vascular cognitive impairment, Binswanger's dementia        (subcortical arteriosclerotic encephalopathy), Cerebral        Autosomal-Dominant Arteriopathy with Subcortical Infarcts and        Leukoencephalopathy (CADASIL or CADASIL syndrome),        frontotemporal lobar degeneration or dementia, HIV-associated        dementia (including asymptomatic neurocognitive impairment        (ANI), minor neurocognitive disorder (MND), and HIV-associated        dementia (HAD) (also called AIDS dementia complex [ADC] or HIV        encephalopathy), Lewy body dementia, pre-senile dementia (mild        cognitive impairment, MCI), glaucoma, Huntington's diseases (or        chorea, HD), or a cognitive defect associated with HD; multiple        sclerosis (MS), multiple system atrophy (MSA), Parkinson's        disease, Parkinsonism Plus, spinocerebellar ataxias,        Steel-Richardson-Olszewski disease (progressive supranuclear        palsy), attention deficit disorder (ADD) or attention deficit        hyperactivity disorder (ADHD).        [47]. A method according to [45] above, or according to other        embodiments of the invention, wherein the disease, health        condition or disorder is neuropathic pain.        [48]. A method according to [45] above, or according to other        embodiments of the invention, wherein the disease, health        condition or disorder is selected from a psychiatric, mental,        mood or affective disorder selected from a bipolar disorder,        schizophrenia, general psychosis, drug-induced psychosis, a        delusional disorder, schizoaffective disorder, obsessive        compulsive disorder (OCD), a depressive disorder, an anxiety        disorder, a panic disorder, or post-traumatic stress disorder        (PTSD).        [49]. A method according to [45] above, or according to other        embodiments of the invention, wherein the disease, health        condition or disorder is selected from traumatic or        non-traumatic injury to the brain or cognitive impairment or        dysfunction resulting from brain injuries or neurodegenerative        disorders.        [50]. A method according to [45] above, or according to other        embodiments of the invention, wherein the disease, health        condition or disorder is selected from Alzheimer's disease or        pre-Alzheimer's disease, mild to moderate Alzheimer's disease or        moderate to severe Alzheimer's disease.        [51]. A method according to [45] above, or according to other        embodiments of the invention, wherein the disease, health        condition or disorder is selected from a dystonia or a        dyskinesia.        [52]. A method according to [45] above, or according to other        embodiments of the invention, wherein the disease, health        condition or disorder is selected from a disorder characterized        by a relative reduction in synaptic plasticity and synaptic        processes, including Fragile X, Rhett's disorder, Williams        syndrome, Renpenning's syndrome, autism spectrum disorders,        including autism, Asperger's syndrome, pervasive development        disorder and childhood disintegrative disorder.        [53]. A method according to [45] above, or according to other        embodiments of the invention, wherein the disease, health        condition or disorder is selected from chemo brain, levo-dopa        induced addictive behavior, alcoholism, narcotic dependence        (including to amphetamine, opiates or other substances) and        substance abuse.        [54]. A method for treating a disease, health condition or        disorder the method comprising administering to a subject in        need of treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a        compound of any of [1] to [43] above, or a pharmaceutical        composition of [44] above, or according to other embodiments of        the invention, wherein the disease, health condition or disorder        is selected from:    -   disorders related to high blood pressure and decreased coronary        blood flow, increased acute and chronic coronary blood pressure,        arterial hypertension, vascular disorder resulting from cardiac        and renal complications, heart disease, stroke, cerebral        ischemia, renal failure, resistant hypertension, diabetic        hypertension, congestive heart failure, diastolic or systolic        dysfunction, coronary insufficiency, arrhythmia, reduction of        ventricular preload, cardiac hypertrophy, heart        failure/cardiorenal syndrome, portal hypertension, endothelial        dysfunction or injury;    -   thromboembolic disorder, ischemia, myocardial infarction,        stroke, transient ischemic attack (TIA), obstructive        thromboanginitis, stable or unstable angina pectoris, coronary        spasms, variant angina, Prinzmetal's angina, prevention of        restenosis after thrombolysis therapies, thrombogenic disorders;    -   a CNS disease, health condition or disorder selected from        Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Down        syndrome, dementia, vascular dementia, mixed dementia, vascular        cognitive impairment, Binswanger's dementia, Cerebral        Autosomal-Dominant Arteriopathy with Subcortical Infarcts and        Leukoencephalopathy, frontotemporal lobar degeneration or        dementia, HIV-associated dementia (including asymptomatic        neurocognitive impairment (ANI), minor neurocognitive disorder        (MND), and HIV-associated dementia (HAD) (also called AIDS        dementia complex [ADC] or HIV encephalopathy), Lewy body        dementia, pre-senile dementia, glaucoma, Huntington's diseases,        or a cognitive defect associated with HD; multiple sclerosis,        multiple system atrophy, Parkinson's disease, Parkinsonism Plus,        spinocerebellar ataxies, Steel-Richardson-Olszewski disease,        attention deficit disorder and attention deficit hyperactivity        disorder, Alzheimer's disease or pre-Alzheimer's disease, mild        to moderate Alzheimer's disease or moderate to severe        Alzheimer's disease, traumatic (closed or open, penetrating head        injuries) brain injury (TBI), nontraumatic (stroke, aneurism,        hypoxia) injury to the brain, cognitive impairment or        dysfunction resulting from brain injuries or neurodegenerative        disorder, dystonia, dyskinesia, a disorder characterized by a        relative reduction in synaptic plasticity and synaptic        processes, Fragile X, Rhett's disorder, Williams syndrome,        Renpenning's syndrome, autism spectrum disorders, including        autism, Asperger's syndrome, pervasive development disorder,        childhood disintegrative disorder, neuropathic pain, bipolar        disorder, schizophrenia, general psychosis, drug-induced        psychosis, a delusional disorder, schizoaffective disorder,        obsessive compulsive disorder, a depressive disorder, an anxiety        disorder, a panic disorder, post-traumatic stress disorder,        chemo brain, levo-dopa induced addictive behavior, alcoholism,        narcotic dependence or substance abuse;    -   peripheral arterial disease, peripheral occlusive arterial        disease, peripheral vascular disease, hypertonia, Raynaud's        syndrome or phenomenon, critical limb ischemia, vasculitis,        peripheral embolism, intermittent claudication, vaso-occlusive        crisis, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, Becker muscular dystrophy,        microcirculation abnormalities, control of vascular leakage or        permeability;    -   shock, sepsis, cardiogenic shock, control of leukocyte        activation, inhibition or modulation of platelet aggregation;    -   pulmonary hypertension, pulmonary arterial hypertension,        associated pulmonary vascular remodeling, localized thrombosis,        right heart hypertrophy, pulmonary hypertonia, primary pulmonary        hypertension, secondary pulmonary hypertension, familial        pulmonary hypertension, sporadic pulmonary hypertension,        pre-capillary pulmonary hypertension, idiopathic pulmonary        hypertension, thrombotic pulmonary arteriopathy, plexogenic        pulmonary arteriopathy, cystic fibrosis, bronchoconstriction or        pulmonary bronchoconstriction, acute respiratory distress        syndrome, lung fibrosis, lung transplant;    -   pulmonary hypertension associated with or related to: left        ventricular dysfunction, hypoxemia, WHO groups I, II, III, IV        and V hypertensions, mitral valve disease, constrictive        pericarditis, aortic stenosis, cardiomyopathy, mediastinal        fibrosis, pulmonary fibrosis, anomalous pulmonary venous        drainage, pulmonary venooclusive disease, pulmonary vasculitis,        collagen vascular disease, congenital heart disease, pulmonary        venous hypertension, interstitial lung disease, sleep-disordered        breathing, sleep apnea, alveolar hypoventilation disorders,        chronic exposure to high altitude, neonatal lung disease,        alveolar-capillary dysplasia, sickle cell disease, other        coagulation disorders, chronic thromboembolism, pulmonary        embolism (due to tumor, parasites or foreign material),        connective tissue disease, lupus, schistosomiasis, sarcoidosis,        chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, asthma, emphysema,        chronic bronchitis, pulmonary capillary hemangiomatosis,        histiocytosis X, lymphangiomatosis and compressed pulmonary        vessels (such as due to adenopathy, tumor or fibrosing        mediastinitis);    -   atherosclerosis (e.g., associated with endothelial injury,        platelet and monocyte adhesion and aggregation, smooth muscle        proliferation and migration), restenosis (e.g., developed after        thrombolysis therapies, percutaneous transluminal angioplasties        (PTAs), percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasties (PTCAs)        and bypass), inflammation;    -   cardiovascular disease associated with metabolic syndrome (e.g.,        obesity, dyslipidemia, diabetes, high blood pressure),        dyslipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia,        sitosterolemia, fatty liver disease, hepatitis, preeclampsia,        polycystic kidney disease progression, subcutaneous fat,        obesity;    -   liver cirrhosis associated with chronic liver disease, hepatic        fibrosis, hepatic stellate cell activation, hepatic fibrous        collagen and total collagen accumulation; liver disease of        necro-inflammatory and/or of immunological origin; renal        fibrosis and renal failure resulting from chronic kidney        diseases or insufficiency (e.g. due to accumulation/deposition        and tissue injury, progressive sclerosis, glomerulonephritis);        prostate hypertrophy systemic sclerosis; cardiac interstitial        fibrosis; cardiac remodeling and fibrosis; cardiac hypertrophy;        non-alcoholic steatohepatitis or NASH;    -   ischemia, reperfusion damage; ischemia/reperfusion associated        with organ transplant, lung transplant, pulmonary transplant,        cardiac transplant; conserving blood substituents in trauma        patients;    -   erectile dysfunction; impotence; premature ejaculation; female        sexual dysfunction, vaginal atrophy, dyspaneuria, atrophic        vaginitis; benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH) or hypertrophy or        enlargement; bladder outlet obstruction; bladder pain syndrome        (BPS), interstitial cystitis (IC), overactive bladder,        neurogenic bladder and incontinence; diabetic nephropathy;    -   glaucoma, retinopathy, diabetic retinopathy (including        proliferative and non-proliferative), blepharitis, dry eye        syndrome, Sjögren's Syndrome;    -   hearing impairment, partial or total hearing loss; partial or        total deafness; tinnitus; noise-induced hearing loss; dermal        fibrosis, scleroderma, skin fibrosis;    -   microvascular perfusion improvement (e.g., following injury, to        counteract the inflammatory response in perioperative care),        anal fissures, diabetic ulcers; and cancer metastasis,        osteoporosis, gastroparesis; functional dyspepsia; diabetic        complications, diseases associated with endothelial dysfunction,        neurologic disorders associated with decreased nitric oxide        production, achalasia or esophageal achalasia.        [55]. A method of treating or preventing a disease, health        condition or disorder in a subject in need thereof, comprising        administering, alone or in combination therapy, a        therapeutically effective amount of a compound of any of [1] to        [43] above, or a pharmaceutical composition of [44] above, or        according to other embodiments of the invention, wherein the        disease or disorder is one that benefits from sGC stimulation or        from an increase in the concentration of NO or cGMP or both, or        the upregulation of the NO pathway.        [56]. A method of any of [45] to [55] above, or according to        other embodiments of the invention, further comprising a second        amount of an additional suitable therapeutic agent.

While typical embodiments have been set forth for the purpose ofillustration, the foregoing descriptions and examples should not bedeemed to be a limitation on the scope of the invention. Accordingly,various modifications, adaptations, and alternatives may occur to oneskilled in the art without departing from the spirit and scope of thepresent invention.

The invention claimed is:
 1. A compound of Formula I, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,

wherein: the core formed by rings E and A along with the substituents(J_(c))_(p) is represented by the following formula:

wherein the C atom with a symbol * represents the attachment point tothe ring containing G, Z, and Q; and the C atom with a symbol **represents the point of attachment of the 2 instances of J; W is;wherein each J is independently selected from hydrogen and methyl; n is1; and J^(B) is halogen; and each J^(C) is independently selected fromhydrogen, halogen, C₁₋₄ aliphatic, C₁₋₄ alkoxy or —CN; wherein each saidC₁₋₄ aliphatic and C₁₋₄ alkoxy is optionally and independentlysubstituted by up to 3 instances of C₁₋₄ alkoxy, C₁₋₄ haloalkoxy, —OH orhalogen; Q, G and Z are each independently N, S or O, wherein at leasttwo of Q, G and Z are N; q is 0, 1 or 2; R¹⁰ is C₁₋₆ alkyl optionallyand independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, phenyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, 5-or 6-membered heteroaryl optionally and independently substituted with0-3 occurrences of R¹, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl optionally and independentlysubstituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵ or 3-8 membered heterocyclyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵;wherein each of said 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring and each of said3-8 membered heterocyclyl contains up to 3 ring heteroatomsindependently selected from N, O or S; R¹¹ is H, —NR^(a2)R^(b2),—C(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)R^(15a), —SO₂R^(b2), —SR^(b2), halo, —OCF₃,—CN, hydroxyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl optionally and independently substitutedwith 0-2 occurrences of R^(b2), C₂₋₆ alkynyl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-2 occurrences of R^(b2); C₁₋₆ alkyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-5 occurrences of R¹⁵,C₁₋₆ alkoxy optionally and independently substituted with 0-5occurrences of R¹⁵, phenyl optionally and independently substituted with0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵ or3-8 membered heterocyclyl optionally and independently substituted with0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵; wherein each of said 5- to 6-membered heteroaryland each of said 3-8 membered heterocyclyl contains up to 3 ringheteroatoms independently selected from N, O or S; or when R¹⁰ is asubstituent of Z, R¹⁰ and R¹¹, taken together with Z and the carbon towhich R¹¹ is attached, form a 3-10 membered heterocyclic ring optionallyand independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵; wherein eachof said 3-10 membered heterocyclyl contains up to 3 ring heteroatomsindependently selected from N, O or S; R¹⁵ is halo, —OR^(b2), —SR^(b2),—NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)R^(b2), —C(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2), —NR^(b2)C(O)OR^(b2),—OC(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2), C₂₋₄ alkenoxy, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸, phenyl optionallyand independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸, 5- or6-membered heteroaryl optionally and independently substituted with 0-3occurrences of R¹⁸ or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸; wherein each ofsaid 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl ring and each of said 3-10 memberedheterocyclyl contains up to 3 ring heteroatoms independently selectedfrom N, O or S; R^(15a) is C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl optionally and independentlysubstituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸, phenyl optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸, 5- or 6-memberedheteroaryl optionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrencesof R¹⁸ or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl optionally and independentlysubstituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁸; wherein each of said 5- or6-membered heteroaryl ring and each of said 3-10 membered heterocyclylcontains up to 3 ring heteroatoms independently selected from N, O or S;each R¹⁸ is independently selected from halo, hydroxyl, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆ haloalkyl or phenyl; R^(a2) is hydrogen, —C(O)R^(b2), C₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆ haloalkyl; and R^(b2) is hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl or C₁₋₆haloalkyl.
 2. A compound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof, wherein a J^(B) is ortho to the attachment ofthe methylene linker between ring B and the core of the molecule.
 3. Acompound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof, wherein the compound is one of Formula III, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or any of its tautomersthereof.


4. A compound according to claim 3, or a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt thereof, wherein R¹¹ is H, NR^(a2)R^(b2), —C(O)NR^(a2)R^(b2),—C(O)R^(15a), —SO₂R^(b2), —SR^(b2), halo, —OCF₃, —CN, hydroxyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl optionally and independently substituted with 0-2 occurrences ofR^(b2), C₂₋₆ alkynyl optionally and independently substituted with 0-2occurrences of R^(b2); C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally and independentlysubstituted with 0-5 occurrences of R¹⁵, C₁₋₆ alkoxy optionally andindependently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, phenyl optionallyand independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵, 5- or6-membered heteroaryl optionally and independently substituted with 0-3occurrences of R¹⁵, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl optionally and independentlysubstituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵ or 3-8 membered heterocyclyloptionally and independently substituted with 0-3 occurrences of R¹⁵. 5.A compound according to claim 4, or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof, wherein R¹¹ is H or C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally and independentlysubstituted with 0-5 occurrences of R¹⁵.
 6. A compound according toclaim 5, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R¹⁵ ishalo in each instance.
 7. A compound according to claim 6, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein q is
 0. 8. Apharmaceutical composition comprising a compound according to claim 1,or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and at least onepharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
 9. A compoundaccording to claim 1, wherein said compound is of Formula VI, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:

wherein: each J^(B) is halo; n is 1; R¹¹ is H, halo, —NR^(a2)R^(b2),C₁₋₄alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl, or C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, wherein theC₁₋₄alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl, and C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl are eachoptionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selectedfrom halo; R^(a2) is hydrogen or C₁₋₄ alkyl; and R^(b2) is hydrogen orC₁₋₄ alkyl.
 10. A compound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof, wherein said compound is selected from thoselisted below: